Toshiba Portable Generator VF nC1 User Manual

E6581090  
Safety  
precautions  
I
Contents  
Read first  
Connection  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Industrial Inverter  
(For three-phase inductive motors)  
Simple  
operation  
Basic VF-nC1  
operations  
Instruction Manual  
Basic  
parameters  
Extended  
parameters  
Variety of  
operation  
Monitoring the  
operation status  
Ultra-Compact,  
Easy-To-Use Inverter  
Taking measures 9  
to satisfy the  
CE / UL / CSA  
Peripheral  
devices  
10  
TOSVERTTM VF-nC1  
Table of  
parameters  
and data  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Specifications  
Before making  
call - Trip information and  
remedies  
a
service  
Inspection and  
maintenance  
Single-phase 100V class 0.1 to 0.75kW  
Single-phase 200V class 0.2 to 2.2kW  
Three-phase 200V class 0.1 to 2.2kW  
Warranty  
Disposal of the  
inverter  
NOTICE  
1. Make sure that this instruction manual is delivered to the end user of  
the inverter unit.  
2. Read this manual before installing or operating the inverter unit, and  
store it in a safe place for reference.  
© Toshiba Schneider Inverter Corporation 2002  
All Rights Reserved.  
TOSVERT is a trademark of Toshiba Corporation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
See item  
General operation  
I
  Danger  
2.  
Never disassemble, modify or repair. This can result in electric shock, fire and injury. For  
repairs, call your sales agency.  
Disassembly  
prohibited  
2.1  
Never remove the front cover when power is on or open door if enclosed in a cabinet. The  
unit contains many high voltage parts and contact with them will result in electric shock.  
Don't stick your fingers into openings such as cable wiring hole and cooling fan covers. This 2.  
can result in electric shock or other injury.  
Prohibited  
Don't place or insert any kind of object into the inverter (electrical wire cuttings, rods, wires).  
This can result in electric shock or fire.  
2.  
Do not allow water or any other fluid to come in contact with the inverter. This can result in 2.  
electric shock or fire.  
2.1  
Turn power on only after attaching the front cover or closing door if enclosed in a cabinet.  
If power is turned on without the front cover attached or closing door if enclosed in a  
cabinet. This can result in electric shock or other injury.  
If the inverter begins to emit smoke or an unusual odor, or unusual sounds, immediately  
turn power off.  
If the equipment is continued in operation in such a state, the result may be fire. Call your  
local sales agency for repairs.  
Always turn power off if the inverter is not used for long periods of time since there is a  
possibility of malfunction caused by leaks, dust and other material.  
If power is left on with the inverter in that state, it may result in fire.  
3.  
3.  
Mandatory  
See item  
  Warning  
3.  
Do not touch heat radiating fins. These devices are hot, and you'll get burned if you touch  
them.  
Prohibited  
contact  
1.4.4  
Avoid operation in any location where there is direct spraying of the following solvents or  
other chemicals. The plastic parts may be damaged to a certain degree depending on their  
shape, and there is a possibility of the plastic covers coming off and the plastic units being  
dropped.  
If the chemical or solvent is anything other than those shown below, please contact us in  
advance.  
Prohibited  
(Table 1) Examples of applicable chemicals and solvents  
Chemical  
Hydrochloric acid  
(density of 10% or less)  
Sulfuric acid  
(density of 10% or less)  
Nitric acid  
Solvent  
Methanol  
Ethanol  
Triol  
(density of 10% or less)  
Caustic soda  
Ammonia  
Mesopropanol  
Glycerin  
Sodium chloride (salt)  
(Table 2) Examples of unapplicable chemicals and solvents  
Chemical Solvent  
Gasoline,  
Phenol  
kerosene, light oil  
Turpentine oil  
Benzol  
Benzenesulfonic acid  
Thinner  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
See item  
Transportation Installation  
I
   Danger  
1.4.4  
Do not install or operate the inverter if it is damaged or any component is missing.  
This can result in electric shock or fire. Please consult your local sales agency for repairs.  
Do not place any inflammable objects nearby.  
1.4.4  
2.  
If a flame is emitted due to malfunction, it may result in a fire.  
Do not install in any location where the inverter could come into contact with water or other  
fluids.  
Prohibited  
Mandatory  
This can result in electric shock or fire.  
Must be used in the environmental conditions prescribed in the instruction manual.  
Use under any other conditions may result in malfunction.  
1.4.4  
1.4.4  
Must be installed in non-inflammables such as metals.  
The rear panel gets very hot. If installation is in an inflammable object, this can result in fire.  
Do not operate with the front panel cover removed. This can result in electric shock.  
An emergency stop device must be installed that fits with system specifications (e.g. shut  
off input power then engage mechanical brake).  
1.4.4  
1.4.4  
Operation cannot be stopped immediately by the inverter alone, thus risking an accident or  
injury.  
All options used must be those specified by Toshiba. The use of any other option may result  
in an accident.  
1.4.4  
See item  
   Warning  
2.  
When transporting or carrying, do not hold by the front panel covers.  
The covers may come off and the unit will drop out resulting in injury.  
Do not install in any area where the unit would be subject to large amounts of vibration.  
That could result in the unit falling, resulting in injury.  
1.4.4  
Prohibited  
Mandatory  
1.4.4  
1.4.4  
The main unit must be installed on a base that can bear the unit's weight.  
If the unit is installed on a base that cannot withstand that weight, the unit may fall resulting  
in injury.  
If braking is necessary (to hold motor shaft), install a mechanical brake. The brake on the  
inverter will not function as a mechanical hold, and if used for that purpose, injury may  
result.  
Wiring  
See item  
   Danger  
2.2  
2.2  
Do not connect input power to the output (motor side) terminals (U/T1,V/T2,W/T3). That will  
destroy the inverter and may result in fire.  
Do not connect resistors to the DC terminals (across PA/+-PC/- or PO-PC/-). That may  
cause a fire.  
Prohibited  
Connect resistors as directed by the instructions for "Installing separate braking resistors."  
Within 15 minutes after turning off input power, do not touch wires of devices (MCCB)  
connected to the input side of the inverter.  
2.2  
That could result in electric shock.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com.3All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
See item  
I
   Danger  
2.1  
Electrical construction work must be done by a qualified expert.  
Connection of input power by someone who does not have that expert knowledge may  
result in fire or electric shock.  
Connect output terminals (motor side) correctly.  
If the phase sequence is incorrect, the motor will operate in reverse and that may result in  
injury.  
2.1  
Mandatory  
Wiring must be done after installation.  
If wiring is done prior to installation that may result in injury or electric shock.  
The following steps must be performed before wiring.  
2.1  
2.1  
Turn off all input power.  
Wait at least 15 minutes and check to make sure that the charge lamp is no longer lit.  
Use a tester that can measure DC voltage (400VDC or more), and check to make sure  
that the voltage to the DC main circuits (across PA/+-PC/-) is 45V or less.  
If these steps are not properly performed, the wiring will cause electric shock.  
Tighten the screws on the terminal board to specified torque.  
If the screws are not tightened to the specified torque, it may lead to fire.  
Check to make sure that the input power voltage is +10%, -15% of the rated power voltage  
written on the rating label (±10% when the load is 100% in continuous operation)  
If the input power voltage is not +10%, -15% of the rated power voltage (±10% when the  
load is 100% in continuous operation) this may result in fire.  
2.1  
1.4.4  
2.1  
2.2  
Ground must be connected securely.  
If the ground is not securely connected, it could lead to electric shock or fire when a  
malfunction or current leak occurs.  
Be Grounded  
See item  
2.1  
   Warning  
Do not attach equipment (such as noise filters or surge absorbers) that has built-in  
capacitors to the output (motor side) terminals.  
That could result in a fire.  
Prohibited  
Operations  
See item  
   Danger  
3.  
Do not touch inverter terminals when electrical power is going to the inverter even if the  
motor is stopped.  
Touching the inverter terminals while power is connected to it may result in electric shock.  
Do not touch switches when the hands are wet and do not try to clean the inverter with a  
damp cloth. Such practices may result in electric shock.  
Do not go near the motor in alarm-stop status when the retry function is selected.  
The motor may suddenly restart and that could result in injury.  
Take measures for safety, e.g. attaching a cover to the motor, against accidents when the  
motor unexpectedly restarts.  
3.  
3.  
Prohibited  
3.  
3.  
Turn input power on after attaching the front cover.  
When storing inside the cabinet and using with the front cover removed, always close the  
cabinet doors first and then turn power on. If the power is turned on with the front cover or  
the cabinet doors open, it may result in electric shock.  
Make sure that operation signals are off before resetting the inverter after malfunction.  
If the inverter is reset before turning off the operating signal, the motor may restart  
suddenly causing injury.  
Mandatory  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
See item  
   Warning  
I
3.  
Observe all permissible operating ranges of motors and mechanical equipment. (Refer to  
the motor's instruction manual.) Not observing these ranges may result in injury.  
Prohibited  
When sequence for restart after a momentary power failure is selected  
(inverter)  
See item  
   Warning  
6.11.1  
Stand clear of motors and mechanical equipment  
If the motor stops due to a momentary power failure, the equipment will start suddenly after  
power recovers. This could result in unexpected injury.  
Attach warnings about sudden restart after a momentary power failure on inverters, motors 6.11.1  
and equipment for prevention of accidents in advance.  
Mandatory  
When retry function is selected (inverter)  
See item  
6.11.3  
 Warning  
If the motor and equipment stop when the alarm is given, selection of the retry function will  
restart them suddenly after the specified time has elapsed. This could result in unexpected  
injury.  
Stand clear of motors and equipment.  
Mandatory  
Attach warnings about sudden restart in retry function on inverters, motors and equipment 6.11.3  
for prevention of accidents in advance.  
Maintenance and inspection  
See item  
14.2  
   Danger  
Do not replace parts.  
This could be a cause of electric shock, fire and bodily injury. To replace parts, call the local  
sales agency.  
Prohibited  
Mandatory  
14.  
14.  
The equipment must be inspected every day.  
If the equipment is not inspected and maintained, errors and malfunctions may not be  
discovered and that could result in accidents.  
Before inspection, perform the following steps.  
Turn off all input power to the inverter.  
Wait for at least 15 minutes and check to make sure that the charge lamp is no longer lit.  
Use a tester that can measure DC voltages (400VDC or more), and check to make sure  
that the voltage to the DC main circuits (across PA/+-PC/-) is 45V or less.  
If inspection is performed without performing these steps first, it could lead to electric  
shock.  
Disposal  
See item  
16.  
   Warning  
If you throw away the inverter, have it done by a specialist in industry waste disposal*.  
If you throw away the inverter by yourself, this can result in explosion of capacitor or  
produce noxious gases, resulting in injury.  
(*) Persons who specialize in the processing of waste and known as "industrial waste product  
collectors and transporters" or "industrial waste disposal persons."  
If the collection, transport and disposal of industrial waste is done by someone who is not  
licensed for that job, it is a punishable violation of the law. (Law on Waste Disposal and  
Cleaning)  
Mandatory  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com.5All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Attach warning labels  
I
Shown here are examples of warning labels to prevent, in advance, accidents in relation to  
inverters, motors and other equipment.  
If the inverter has been programmed for auto-restart function after momentary power failure or  
retry function, place warning labels in a place where they can be easily seen and read.  
If the inverter has been programmed for restart  
sequence of momentary power failure, place  
warning labels in a place where they can be  
easily seen and read.  
If the retry function has been selected, place  
warning labels in a location where they can be  
easily seen and read.  
(Example of warning label)  
(Example of warning label)  
(Functions  
(Functions programmed  
Warning  
Warning  
for restart)  
programmed for retry)  
Do not go near motors and equipment.  
Motors and equipment that have stopped  
temporarily after momentary power failure will  
restart suddenly after recovery.  
Do not go near motors and equipment.  
Motors and equipment that have stopped  
temporarily after an alarm will restart  
suddenly after the specified time has  
elapsed.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
― Contents ―  
I.  
Safety precautions・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
1
1.  
Read first・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
Check purchased product ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
Contents of the product code ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
Name and function of each part・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
Notes on the application ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
A-1  
A-1  
A-1  
A-2  
A-9  
1.1  
1.2  
1.3  
1.4  
2.  
Connection ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ B-1  
Cautions on wiring ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ B-1  
Standard connections ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ B-2  
2.1  
2.2  
2.3  
Description of terminals・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ B-7  
3.  
4.  
5.  
Simple operation ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ C-1  
3.1  
4.1  
Simple operation of the VF-nC1・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
C-2  
Basic VF-nC1 operations ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ D-1  
How to set parameters・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ D-2  
Basic parameters・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ E-1  
5.1  
5.2  
5.3  
5.4  
5.5  
5.6  
5.7  
5.8  
5.9  
Selecting an operation mode ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
Meter setting and adjustment ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
E-1  
E-2  
Standard default setting・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ E-4  
Selecting forward and reverse runs (operation panel only)・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ E-5  
Setting acceleration/deceleration time ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ E-5  
Maximum frequency・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ E-6  
Upper limit and lower limit frequencies ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ E-6  
Base frequency ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
Selecting control mode ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ E-7  
E-9  
E-7  
5.10 Setting the electronic thermal・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
5.11 Preset speed operation (speeds in 15 steps) ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ E-11  
6.  
Extended parameters ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ F-1  
6.1  
6.2  
6.3  
6.4  
6.5  
6.6  
6.7  
6.8  
6.9  
Output signal-related parameters・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
Parameters related to terminal function selection・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
Basic parameters 2・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
Analog signals for frequency setting ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
Operation frequency・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ F-10  
DC braking・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
Jump frequency – Jumping resonant frequencies ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
Preset speed operation frequencies 8 to 15 ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ F-12  
PWM carrier frequency ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ F-12  
F-1  
F-3  
F-7  
F-8  
F-11  
F-12  
6.10 Trip-less intensification ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ F-13  
6.11 Performing PI control ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ F-17  
6.12 Improving torque and speed characteristics ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ F-19  
6.13 Acceleration/deceleration patterns and acceleration/deceleration 2 ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ F-20  
6.14 Protection functions ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ F-21  
6.15 Operation panel parameters・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ F-26  
6.16 Communication function (common serial) ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
F-28  
7.  
8.  
Variety of operation ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
Setting the operation frequency ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
Setting the operation mode・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
G-1  
G-1  
G-3  
7.1  
7.2  
Monitoring the operation status・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ H-1  
8.1  
Status monitor mode ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ H-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com.i All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
H-3  
8.2  
Display of trip information ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
9.  
Taking measures to satisfy the CE / UL / CSA・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
I-1  
9.1  
9.2  
Compliance with the CE Marking・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ I-1  
Compliance with UL Standard and CSA Standard ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ I-6  
10. Peripheral devices・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
10.1 Selection of wiring materials and devices・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
10.2 Installation of a magnetic contactor・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
10.3 Installation of an overload relay ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
J-1  
J-1  
J-3  
J-3  
11. Table of parameters and data ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ K-1  
11.1 User parameters ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
11.2 Basic parameters ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
K-1  
K-1  
11.3 Extended parameters・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ K-3  
12. Specifications・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
12.1 Models and their standard specifications ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
12.2 External dimensions/weights ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
L-1  
L-1  
L-4  
13. Before making a service call – Trip information and remedies ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
13.1 Trip causes/warnings and remedies ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
13.2 Restoring the inverter from a trip ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
M-1  
M-1  
M-6  
13.3 If the motor does not run while no trip message is displayed ...・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ M-7  
13.4 How to determine the causes of other problems・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
M-8  
14. Inspection and maintenance ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
14.1 Regular inspection ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
N-1  
N-1  
14.2 Periodical inspection ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ N-2  
14.3 Making a call for servicing・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
14.4 Keeping the inverter in storage ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
N-4  
N-4  
15. Warranty ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
O-1  
P-1  
16. Disposal of the inverter ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
1. Read first  
1.1  
Check purchased product  
1
Before using the product you have purchased, check to make sure that it is exactly what you  
ordered.  
  Warning  
Use an inverter that conforms to the specifications of power supply and three-  
phase induction motor being used. If the inverter being used does not conform to  
those specifications, not only will the three-phase induction motor not rotate  
correctly, but it may cause serious accidents through overheating and fire.  
Mandatory  
Applicable  
motor label  
Inverter main unit  
Name plate  
Inverter type  
TRANSISTOR INVERTER  
Warning label  
VFNC1-2007P  
0.75kW-1.6kVA-1HP  
Pet name  
INPUT  
OUTPUT  
U(V)  
3PH 200/240 3PH 200/240  
Power supply  
Motor capacity  
F(Hz)  
I(A)  
50/60  
6.3  
0.5/200  
4.0  
Power supply  
Rated output current  
and capacity  
VFNC1-2007P  
AIC1000A FUSE CC/J 8max  
Cu AWG14:75  
3PH - 200V - 0.75kW  
0.8Nm 7.1lb.in  
Lot No. 03D 12345678  
Serial No. 131791180123  
Motor Protective Device Class 10  
Carton box  
LISTBO 170M  
164581  
ND.CONT.BQ. Made in JAPAN  
Applicable  
motor label  
Nameplate  
1.2  
Contents of the product code  
Here is explained the type and form written on the label  
Type  
Form  
V
F
N C  
1
S
2
0
0
7
P
L
– W –  
A
Model name  
Input voltage  
Applicable motor  
capacity  
Additional functions 2  
Destination  
Special specification code  
TOSVERT  
VF-nC1 Series  
L : High-attenuation  
filter inside  
001: 0.1kW  
002: 0.2kW  
004: 0.4kW  
007:0.75kW  
015: 1.5kW  
022: 2.2kW  
W
: World wide  
: Japan  
1:100V115V  
2:200V240V  
A††: †† is the number  
*
The code indicates a Toshiba’s  
procurement route.  
Number of  
power phases  
S: single-phase  
None:  
three-phase  
Additional functions 1  
P : Operation panel  
type  
Warning : Always shut power off first then check the ratings label of inverter held in a cabinet.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comA.-1All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
1.3  
Name and function of each part  
1.3.1  
Operation keypad panel  
Monitor key  
1
RUN lamp  
Input main circuit  
terminal block  
Switches among  
operation, setting and  
status monitor modes.  
Blinks while the inverter is in  
operation.  
Used to connect a power  
source.  
PRG lamp  
RUN key  
Pressing this key while  
the RUN key lamp is  
lighted starts operations.  
Lights when the inverter  
is in parameter setting  
mode.  
Up/down key  
STOP key  
Every pressing of this key  
while the RUN key lamp is  
lit will cause a slowdown  
stop.  
Enter key  
Reads and writes  
frequency and parameter  
data.  
Frequency adjusting  
knob (potentiometer)  
Allows you to adjust the  
operation frequency when  
the inverter is placed in a  
mode in which the  
potentiometer can be used to  
enter operation commands.  
DC main circuit  
terminal block  
Output main circuit  
terminal block  
Terminals for connecting a  
DC reactor or a DC bus  
Used to connect a motor.  
A-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
[Front panel]  
Charge lamp  
Indicates that high voltage is still  
present within the inverter. Do not  
open the terminal board cover while  
this is lit. This lamp is not provided  
for single-phase 200V European  
models.  
1
Front cover  
Control terminal block  
Connector for optional devices  
Used to control the inverter  
Used to connect an optional device.  
Parameter writer  
Extension panel  
by inputting signals from an  
external control device and  
to output signals to the  
external device.  
RS485/RS232C  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comA.-3All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Caution label on the top surface  
(See Note 1.)  
Main circuit port  Control circuit port  
1
Ventilation slits  
Name Plate  
[Bottom]  
[Right side]  
Note 1: When installing the inverter where the ambient temperature will rise above 40°C, detach  
this caution label.  
An example of a caution label on the top surface translation  
Self-up terminal block  
The self-up terminals  
, R/LI, S/L2, (T/L3), U/T1, V/T2 and W/T3 on the main circuit board were  
factory-set to the UP position to allow you to connect cables smoothly. After you have connected  
cables to these terminals, tighten them securely.  
These terminals are already  
set to the UP position.  
The terminals PO, PA/+ and  
PC/- are not set to the UP  
position. So you will have to set  
them to the UP position before  
connecting cables to them.  
A-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Note: The self-up (self-lifting) terminals of VFNC1 are constructed with plastic body and screws,  
therefore please take following precautions.  
Do not unscrew the power terminals to UP position frequently. (Less than 5 times is  
recommended)  
Do not press the screw when unscrew the main terminals.  
Do not unscrew quickly like using an Electric screw driver.  
Do not pull the power wire during unscrewing the power terminals to UP position.  
Do not unscrew the power terminal to UP position with over torque.  
Do not make any deformation of the cover when unscrewing the power terminals.  
1
1.3.2  
Main circuit and control circuit terminal blocks  
1) Main circuit terminal block  
When using a crimp terminal, cover its caulked part with a tube or use an insulated terminal.  
Screw size  
M3 screw  
tightening torque  
0.8N  
m
1.0N  
m
M3.5 screw  
VFNC1-2001P2007P  
[Main circuit input terminals]  
[Main circuit output terminals]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comA.-5All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
VFNC1-2015P2022P  
[Main circuit input terminals]  
1
[Main circuit output terminals]  
VFNC1S-1001P1004P  
VFNC1S-2002P2007P  
[Main circuit input terminals]  
[Main circuit output terminals]  
A-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
VFNC1S-1007P  
VFNC1S-2015P2022P  
[Main circuit input terminals]  
1
[Main circuit output terminals]  
VFNC1S-2002PL2007PL  
[Main circuit input terminals]  
[Main circuit output terminals]  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comA.-7All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
VFNC1S-2015PL2022PL  
[Main circuit input terminals]  
1
[Main circuit output terminals]  
2) Control circuit terminal block  
The same type of terminal board is provided for all models.  
Sizes of connectable wires  
Solid wire: 0.3 to 1.5 (mm2  
Sizes of connectable wires  
Solid wire: 0.3 to 1.5 (mm2  
)
)
Stranded wire: 0.3 to 1.25 (mm2  
(AWG: 22 to 16)  
)
Stranded wire: 0.3 to 1.5 (mm2  
)
(AWG: 22 to 16)  
Sheath strip length: 6 mm  
Driver bit size: 3.5 × 0.6 mm  
Sheath strip length: 5 mm  
Driver bit size: 2.5 × 0.4 mm  
For details of each terminal, see 2.3.2.  
A-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
1.4  
Notes on the application  
Motors  
1.4.1  
When the VF-nC1 and the motor are used in conjunction, pay attention to the following items.  
1
  Warning  
Use an inverter that conforms to the specifications of the three-phase induction motor  
and power supply being used. If the inverter being used does not conform to those  
specifications, not only will the three-phase induction motor not rotate correctly, but it  
may causes serious accidents through overheating and fire.  
Mandatory  
Comparisons with commercial power operation.  
The VF-nC1 Inverter employs the sinusoidal PWM system. However, the output voltage and  
output current do not assume a precise sine wave, they have a distorted wave that is close to  
sinusoidal waveform. This is why compared to operation with a commercial power there will be  
a slight increase in motor temperature, noise and vibration.  
Operation in the low-speed area  
When running continuously at low speed in conjunction with a general purpose motor, there  
may be a decline in that motor's cooling effect. If this happens, operate with the output  
decreased from rated load.  
If you want to run continuously low speed operations at rated torque, please use the VF motor  
made especially for Toshiba inverter. When operating in conjunction with a VF motor, you must  
change the inverter's motor overload protection level to "VF motor use (QNO)".  
Adjusting the overload protection level  
The VF-nC1 Inverter protects against overloads with its overload detection circuits (electronic  
thermal). The electronic thermal's reference current is set to the inverter's rated current, so that  
it must be adjusted in line with the rated current of the general purpose motor being used in  
combination.  
High speed operation at and above 60Hz  
Operating at frequencies greater than 60Hz will increase noise and vibration. There is also a  
possibility that such operation will exceed the motor's mechanical strength limits and the  
bearing limits so that you should inquire to the motor's manufacturer about such operation.  
Method of lubricating load mechanisms.  
Operating an oil-lubricated reduction gear and gear motor in the low-speed areas will worsen  
the lubricating effect. Check with the manufacturer of the reduction gear to find out about  
operable gearing area.  
Extremely low loads and low inertia loads  
The motor may demonstrate instability such as abnormal vibrations or overcurrent trips at light  
loads of 50 percent or under of the load percentage, or when the load's inertia moment is  
extremely small. If that happens reduce the carrier frequency.  
Occurrence of instability  
Unstable phenomena may occur under the load and motor combinations shown below.  
Combined with a motor that exceeds applicable motor ratings recommended for the inverter  
Combined with special motors such as explosion-proof motors  
To deal with the above lower the settings of inverter carrier frequency.  
Combined with couplings between load devices and motors with high backlash  
Combined with loads that have sharp fluctuations in rotation such as piston movements  
Braking a motor when cutting off power supply  
A motor with its power cut off goes into free-run, and does not stop immediately. To stop the  
motor quickly as soon as the power is cut off install an auxiliary brake. There are different kinds  
of brake devices, both electrical and mechanical. Select the brake that is best for the system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comA.-9All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Loads that generate negative torque  
When combined with loads that generate negative torque the protection for overvoltage and  
overcurrent on the inverter will go into operation and may cause a trip. For this kind of situation,  
you must install a dynamic braking resistor, etc. that complies with the load conditions.  
Motor with brake  
1
If a motor with brake is connected directly to the output side of the inverter, the brake will not  
release because voltage at startup is low. Wire the brake circuit separately from the motor's  
main circuits.  
MC2  
MC2  
B
B
MC1  
MC1  
IM  
IM  
FM/  
OUT  
Three-phase  
power supply  
FLB FLC ST  
CC  
Three-phase  
power supply  
P15  
MC3  
RY  
MC1  
RY  
MC3  
MC2  
MC2  
MC3  
Circuit configuration 1  
Circuit configuration 2  
In circuit configuration 1, the brake is turned on and off through MC2 and MC3. If the circuit is  
configured in some other way, the overcurrent trip may be activated because of the locked rotor  
current when the brake goes into operation. Circuit configuration 2 uses low-speed signal  
FM/OUT to turn on and off the brake. Turning the brake on and off with a low-speed signal may  
be better in such applications as elevators. Please confer with us before designing the system.  
1.4.2  
Inverters  
Protecting inverters from overcurrent  
The inverter has an overcurrent protection function. However because the programmed current  
level is set to the inverter's maximum applicable motor, if the motor is one of small capacity and  
it is in operation, the overcurrent level and the electronic thermal protection must be readjusted.  
If adjustment is necessary, see 5-10 in Chapter 5, and make adjustments as directed.  
Inverter capacity  
Do not operate a large capacity motor with a small capacity (kVA) inverter even with light loads.  
Current ripple will raise the output peak current making it easier to set off the overcurrent trip.  
Power factor improving capacitors  
Power factor improving capacitors cannot be installed on the output side of the inverter. When a  
motor is run that has a power factor improving capacitor attached to it, remove the capacitors.  
This can cause inverter malfunction trips and capacitor destruction.  
U
Inverter  
IM  
V
W
Remove the power factor improving  
capacitor and surge absorber  
Power factor improving capacitor  
Operating at other than rated voltage  
Connections to voltages other than the rated voltage described in the rating label cannot be  
made. If a connection must be made to a power supply other than one with rated voltage, use a  
transformer to raise or lower the voltage to the rated voltage.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.cAo-1m0 . All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Circuit interrupting when two or more inverters are used on the same power line.  
(circuit  
MCCB1  
MCCB2 interrupting fuse)  
INV1  
INV2  
MCCB3  
1
MCCBn1  
INVn  
Breaking of selected inverter  
There is no fuse in the inverter's main circuit. Thus, as the diagram above shows, when more than  
one inverter is used on the same power line, you must select interupting characteristics so that  
only the MCCB2 will trip and the MCCB1 will not trip when a short occurs in the inverter (INV1).  
When you cannot select the proper characteristics install a circuit interrupting fuse between the  
MCCB2 and the INV1.  
Disposal  
If an inverter is no longer usable, dispose of it as industrial waste.  
What to do about leak current  
  Warning  
1.4.3  
Current may leak through the inverter's input/output wires because of insufficient electrostatic  
capacity on the motor with bad effects on peripheral equipment. The leak current's value is  
affected by the carrier frequency and the length of the input/output wires. Test and adopt the  
following remedies against leak current.  
(1) Leakage current from the inverter main unit  
As compared with other types of inverters, a large amount of current leaks from your inverter  
when it is used in delta connection (with one phase grounded). Take this into consideration when  
selecting an earth leakage breaker.  
    <Leakage current in delta connection (one phase grounded)> (For reference only)  
VFNC1-2001P to 2022P  
VFNC1S-2002P to 2007P  
VFNC1S-1001P to 1007P  
VFNC1S-2002PL to 2007PL  
VFNC1S-2015P to 2022P  
VFNC1S-2015PL to 2022PL  
:
:
:
:
:
:
About 1mA  
About 6mA  
About 3mA  
About 11mA  
About 3mA  
About 17mA  
(2) Effects of leakage current across ground  
Leakage current may flow not just through the inverter system but also through ground wires to  
other systems. Leakage current will cause earth leakage breakers, leak current relays, ground  
relays, fire alarms and sensors to operate improperly, and it will cause superimposed noise on the  
CRT screen or display of incorrect current amounts during current detection with the CT.  
Power  
supply  
ELCB  
Inverter  
M
ELCB  
Inverter  
M
Leakage current path across ground  
A-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Remedies:  
1. Reduce PWM carrier frequency.  
The setting of PWM carrier frequency is done with the parameter Hꢀꢁꢁ.  
2. Use high frequency remedial products for earth leakage breakers. If you use equipment like  
this, there is no need to reduce the PWM carrier frequency.  
3. If the sensors and CRT are affected, it can be remedied using the reduction of PWM carrier  
frequency described in 1 above, but if this cannot be remedied since there is an increase in  
the motor's magnetic noise, please consult with Toshiba.  
1
(3) Affects of leakage current across lines  
Thermal relay  
CT  
Inverter  
Power  
supply  
M
A
Leak current path across wires  
Thermal relays  
The high frequency component of current leaking into electrostatic capacity between inverter  
output wires will increase the effective current values and make externally connected thermal  
relays operate improperly. If the wires are more than 50 meters long, it will be easy for the  
external thermal relay to operate improperly with models having motors of low rated current  
(several A(ampere) or less), because the leak current will increase in proportion to the motor  
rating.  
Remedies:  
1. Use the electronic thermal built into the inverter.  
The setting of the electronic thermal is done using parameter QNO & VJT.  
2. Reduce the inverter's PWM carrier frequency. However, that will increase the motor's  
magnetic noise. Use parameter Hꢀꢁꢁ for setting the PWM carrier frequency.  
3. This can be improved by installing 0.1µ~0.5µF-1000V film capacitor to the input/output  
terminals of each phase in the thermal relay.  
U/T1  
V/T2  
IM  
W/T3  
Thermal relay  
CT and ammeter  
If a CT and ammeter are connected externally to detect inverter output current, the leak  
current's high frequency component may destroy the ammeter. If the wires are more than 50  
meters long, it will be easy for the high frequency component to pass through the externally  
connected CT and be superimposed on and burn the ammeter with models having motors of  
low rated current (several A(ampere) or less) because the leak current will increase in  
proportion to the motor's rated current.  
Remedies:  
1. Use a multi-function programmable output terminal for the inverter’s control circuit.  
A current can be put out via the FM/OUT terminal.  
If the meter is connected, use an ammeter of 1mAdc full scale or a voltmeter of 7.5V-1mA full  
scale.  
2. Use the monitor functions built into the inverter.  
Use the monitor functions on the panel built into the inverter to check current values.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.cAo-1m2 . All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
1.4.4  
Installation  
Installation environment  
The VF-nC1 Inverter is an electronic control instrument. Take full consideration to installing it in  
the proper operating environment.  
1
  Danger  
Do not place any inflammable substances near the VF-nC1 Inverter. If an accident  
occurs in which flame is emitted, this could lead to fire.  
Prohibited  
Mandatory  
Operate under the environmental conditions prescribed in the instruction manual.  
Operations under any other conditions may result in malfunction.  
  Warning  
Do not install the VF-nC1 Inverter in any location subject to large amounts of  
vibration.  
This could cause the unit to fall, resulting in bodily injury.  
Prohibited  
Mandatory  
Check to make sure that the input power voltage is +10%, -15% of the rated power  
voltage written on the rating label (±10% when the load is 100% in continuous  
operation)  
If the input power voltage is not +10%, -15% of the rated power voltage (±10%  
when the load is 100% in continuous operation) this may result in fire.  
Avoid operation in any location where there is direct spraying of the following  
solvents or other chemicals. The plastic parts may be damaged to a certain degree  
depending on their shape, and there is a possibility of the plastic covers coming off  
and the plastic units being dropped.  
If the chemical or solvent is anything other than those shown below, please contact  
us in advance.  
Prohibited  
(Table 1) Examples of applicable chemicals and solvents  
Chemical  
Solvent  
Hydrochloric acid  
(density of 10% or less)  
Sulfuric acid  
(density of 10% or less)  
Nitric acid  
Methanol  
Ethanol  
Triol  
(density of 10% or less)  
Caustic soda  
Ammonia  
Mesopropanol  
Glycerin  
Sodium chloride (salt)  
(Table 2) Examples of unapplicable chemicals and solvents  
Chemical  
Phenol  
Solvent  
Gasoline,  
kerosene, light oil  
Turpentine oil  
Benzol  
Benzenesulfonic acid  
Thinner  
Note: The plastic cover has resistance to deformation by the above applicable  
solvents. They are not examples for resistance to fire or explosion.  
Do not install in any location of high  
temperature, high humidity, moisture  
condensation and freezing and avoid  
locations where there is exposure to water  
and/or where there may be large amounts  
of dust, metallic fragments and oilmist.  
Do not install in any location where  
corrosive gases or grinding fluids are  
present.  
A-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Operate in areas where ambient temperature ranges from -10°C to 50°C. However, when  
installing the inverter where the ambient temperature will rise above 40°C, detach the caution  
label on the top surface.  
1
5cm  
5cm  
Measurement  
position  
Measurement  
position  
Note: The inverter is a heat-emitting body. Make sure to provide proper space and ventilation  
when installing in the cabinet. When installing the inverter in a cabinet, you are  
recommended to detach the caution label even if the temperature in the cabinet is below  
40°C.  
Do not install in any location that is subject to large amounts of vibration.  
If the VF-nC1 Inverter is installed near any of the equipment listed below, provide measures to  
insure against errors in operation.  
Solenoids:  
Brakes:  
Attach surge suppressor on coil.  
Attach surge suppressor on coil.  
Magnetic contactors: Attach surge suppressor on coil.  
Fluorescent lights: Attach surge suppressor on coil.  
Resistors:  
Place far away from VF-nC1  
Inverter.  
Resistor  
Download from Www.Somanuals.cAo-1m4 . All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
How to install  
  Danger  
Do not install and operate the inverter if it is damaged or any component is missing.  
This can result in electric shock or fire. Please consult your local agency for  
repairs.  
1
Prohibited  
Mandatory  
Must be installed in nonflammables such as metals.  
The rear panel gets very hot so that if installation is in an inflammable object, this  
can result in fire.  
Do not operate with the front panel cover removed. This can result in electric  
shock.  
An emergency stop device must be installed that fits with system specifications  
(e.g. cuts off input power then engages mechanical brakes).  
Operation cannot be stopped immediately by the inverter alone, thus risking an  
accident or injury.  
All options used must be those specified by Toshiba. The use of any other option  
may result in an accident.  
  Warning  
The main unit must be installed on a base that can bear the unit's weight.  
If the unit is installed on a base that cannot withstand that weight, the unit may fall  
resulting in injury.  
Mandatory  
If braking is necessary (to hold motor shaft), install a mechanical brake. The brake  
on the inverter will not function as a mechanical hold, and if used for that purpose,  
injury may result.  
Installation location  
Select a location with good indoor ventilation, place lengthwise in the vertical direction and attach  
to a metal wall surface.  
If you are installing more than one inverter, the separation between inverters should be at least 5  
centimeters, and they should be arranged in horizontal rows.  
If the inverters are horizontally arranged with no space between them (side-by-side installation),  
peel of the ventilation seals on top of the inverters and operate at 40°C or less.  
Standard installation  
Horizontal installation (side-by-side installation)  
10 cm or more  
10 cm or more  
Peel of the ventilation  
seals on top of the inverter  
VFnC1  
VFnC1  
VFnC1  
VFnC1  
5
cm or more  
5
cm or more  
Ambient temperature  
of 40°C or less  
10 cm or more  
The space shown in the diagram is the minimum allowable space. Because air cooled equipment  
has cooling fans built in on the top or bottom surfaces, make the space on top and bottom as large  
as possible to allow for air passage.  
Note: Do not install in any location where there is high humidity or high temperatures and where  
there are large amounts of dust, metallic fragments and oilmist. If you are going to install  
the equipment in any area that presents a potential problem, please consult with Toshiba  
before doing so.  
A-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Calorific values of the inverter and the required ventilation  
The energy loss when the inverter converts power from AC to DC and then back to AC is about  
5-10 percent. In order to suppress the rise in temperature inside the cabinet when this loss  
becomes heat loss, the interior of the cabinet must be ventilated and cooled.  
1
Calorific  
Values (W)  
Amount of  
forcible air  
cooling  
ventilation  
required  
(m3/min)  
0.07  
0.12  
0.17  
0.31  
0.12  
0.17  
0.31  
0.55  
0.72  
0.07  
0.12  
0.17  
0.31  
Heat  
discharge  
surface area  
required for  
Operating  
motor  
capacity  
Voltage Class  
Inverter Type  
Carrier  
frequency  
12kHz  
(kW)  
sealed storage  
cabinet (m2)  
0.24  
0.42  
0.6  
0.1  
0.2  
0.4  
0.75  
0.2  
0.4  
0.75  
1.5  
2.2  
0.1  
0.2  
0.4  
0.75  
1.5  
2.2  
1001P  
1002P  
1004P  
1007P  
2002P(L)  
2004P(L)  
12  
21  
30  
55  
21  
30  
55  
96  
126  
12  
21  
30  
55  
96  
126  
Single-Phase  
100V Class  
VFNC1S-  
1.1  
0.42  
0.6  
1.1  
1.9  
Single-Phase  
200V Class  
VFNC1S- 2007P(L)  
2015P(L)  
2022P(L)  
2001P  
2002P  
2004P  
2007P  
2015P  
2022P  
2.5  
0.24  
0.42  
0.6  
1.1  
1.9  
Three-Phase  
200V Class  
VFNC1-  
0.55  
0.72  
2.5  
Notes  
1) The heat loss for the optional external devices (input reactor, DC reactor, radio noise  
reduction filters, etc.) is not included in the calorific values in the table.  
2) Case of 100% Load Continuation operation.  
Panel designing taking into consideration the effects of noise.  
The inverter generates high frequency noise. When designing the control panel setup,  
consideration must be given to that noise. Examples of measures are given below.  
Wire so that the main circuit wires and the control circuit wires are separated. Do not place  
them in the same conduit, do not run them parallel, and do not bundle them.  
Provide shielding and twisted wire for control circuit wiring.  
Separate the input (power) and output (motor) wires of the main circuit. Do not place them in  
the same conduit, do not run them parallel, and do not bundle them.  
Ground the inverter ground terminals ( ).  
Install surge suppressor on any magnetic contactor and relay coils used around the inverter.  
Install noise filters if necessary.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.cAo-1m6 . All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Installing more than one unit in a cabinet  
If you are installing two or more inverters in one cabinet, pay attention to the following.  
Inverters may be installed side by side with each other with no space left between them.  
When installing inverters side by side, detach the caution label on the top surface of each  
inverter and use them where the ambient temperature will not rise above 40°C.  
When using inverters where the ambient temperature will exceed 40°C, allow a space of 5 cm  
or more between inverters and detach the caution label on the top surface of each inverter.  
Ensure a space of at least 20 cm on the top and bottom of the inverters.  
Install an air deflecting plate so that the heat rising up from the inverter on the bottom does not  
affect the inverter on the top.  
1
Ventilation fan  
Inverter  
Air deflecting  
plate  
Inverter  
A-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
2. Connection  
  Danger  
Never disassemble, modify or repair. This can result in electric shock, fire and  
injury. For repairs, call your sales agency.  
Disassembly  
prohibited  
2
Don’t stick your fingers into openings such as cable wiring hole and cooling fan  
covers. This can result in electric shock or other injury.  
Don't place or insert any kind of object into the inverter (electrical wire cuttings,  
rods, wires). This can result in electric shock or fire.  
Do not allow water or any other fluid to come in contact with the inverter. That may  
result in electric shock or fire.  
Prohibited  
  Warning  
When transporting or carrying, do not hold by the front panel covers.  
The covers may come off and the unit will drop out resulting in injury.  
Prohibited  
2.1  
Cautions on wiring  
  Danger  
Never remove the front cover when power is on or open door if enclosed in a  
cabinet.  
The unit contains many high voltage parts and contact with them will result in  
electric shock.  
Turn power on only after attaching the front cover or closing door if enclosed in a  
cabinet.  
Prohibited  
Mandatory  
If power is turned on without the front cover attached or closing door if enclosed in  
a cabinet. This can result in electric shock or other injury.  
Electrical construction work must be done by a qualified expert.  
Connection of input power by someone who does not have that expert knowledge  
may result in fire or electric shock.  
Connect output terminals (motor side) correctly.  
If the phase sequence is incorrect, the motor will operate in reverse and that may  
result in injury.  
Wiring must be done after installation.  
If wiring is done prior to installation that may result in injury or electric shock.  
The following steps must be performed before wiring.  
Shut off all input power.  
Wait at least 15 minutes and check to make sure that the charge lamp is no  
longer lit.  
Use a tester that can measure DC voltage (400VDC or more), and check to  
make sure that the voltage to the DC main circuits (across PA/+-PC/C) is 45V or  
less.  
If these steps are not properly performed, the wiring will cause electric shock.  
Tighten the screws on the terminal board to specified torque.  
If the screws are not tightened to the specified torque, it may lead to fire.  
Ground must be connected securely.  
If the ground is not securely connected, it could lead to electric shock or fire when a  
malfunction or current leak occurs.  
Be  
Grounded  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comB.-1All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
  Warning  
Do not attach devices with built-in capacitors (such as noise filters or surge  
absorber) to the output (motor side) terminal.  
This could cause a fire.  
Prohibited  
Preventing radio noise  
2
To prevent electrical interference such as radio noise, separately bundle wires to the main circuit's  
power terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) and wires to the motor terminals (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3).  
Control and main power supply  
The control power supply and the main circuit power supply for the VF-nC1 are the same.  
If a malfunction or trip causes the main circuit to be shut off, control power will also be shut off.  
When checking the cause of the malfunction or the trip, use the trip holding retention selection  
parameter.  
Wiring  
Because the space between the main circuit terminals is small use sleeved pressure terminals  
for the connections. Connect the terminals so that adjacent terminals do not touch each other.  
For ground terminal  
use wires of the size that is equivalent to or larger than those given in  
table 10.1 and always ground the inverter (200V voltage class: D type ground [former type 3  
ground]).  
Use as large and short a ground wire as possible and wire it as close as possible to the inverter.  
See the table in 10.1 for wire sizes.  
The length of the main circuit wire in 10.1 should be no longer than 30 meters. If the wire is  
longer than 30 meters, the wire size (diameter) must be increased.  
2.2  
Standard connections  
  Danger  
Do not connect input power to the output (motor side) terminals (U/T1, V/T2,  
W/T3). Connecting input power to the output could destroy the inverter or cause a  
fire.  
Prohibited  
Do not connect resistors to DC terminals (across PA/+-PC/- or across PO-PC/-).  
It could cause a fire.  
First shut off input power and wait at least 15 minutes before touching wires on  
equipment (MCCB) that is connected to inverter power side.  
Touching the wires before that time could result in electric shock.  
Securely connect to ground with a ground wire.  
If a secure connection to ground is not made, this could cause electric shock or fire  
when a malfunction or leak current occurs.  
Be grounded  
B-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
2.2.1  
Standard connection diagram (1)  
This diagram shows a standard wiring of the main circuit.  
(1) Sink <common: CC>  
When using V1/S3 terminal as an analog input terminal (Hꢀꢁꢂ : or )  
DC reactor5  
(DCL: option)  
2
4  
P0  
PA  
PC  
MCCB  
1
R/L1  
S/L2  
T/L3  
U/T1  
V/T2  
W/T3  
Main circuit  
IM  
FLC  
FLB  
FLA  
F
R
Forward  
Reverse  
Control circuit  
Fault output signal  
S1  
S2  
CC  
Preset speed 1  
P5  
VF-nC1  
 *  
3
Connector for  
optional devices  
External potentiometer  
Preset speed 2  
Common  
(3-10k  
)
VI/S3  
CC  
2
or input voltage signal  
0-10Vdc  
Current signal  
4-20mAdc  
FM/OUT2  
CC  
P15  
Ry  
Frequency meter  
(Ammeter)  
Meter  
1-phase series  
MCCB  
R/L1  
S/L2  
Power  
supply  
1-phase series do not have T/L3 terminal.  
*1: Only European model has a built-in noise filter.  
*2: The terminal can be switched between FM/OUT and VI/S3 by changing a  
parameter.  
*3: The terminal can also be used as an input terminal by changing a parameter.  
*4: European models are not provided with PO terminal.  
*5: 1-phase 100V models cannot be used with DC reactors.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comB.-3All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
When using V1/S3 terminal as a logic input terminal (Hꢀꢁꢂ : )  
6  
DC reactor  
(DCL: option)  
2
5  
P0  
PA  
PC  
MCCB  
1  
R/L1  
S/L2  
T/L3  
U/T1  
V/T2  
W/T3  
Main circuit  
IM  
FLC  
FLB  
FLA  
F
Forward  
Reverse  
Control circuit  
Fault output signal  
R
S1  
Preset speed 1  
Preset speed 2  
Common  
VF-nC1  
Connector for  
optional devices  
S2  
CC  
P15  
4  
VI/S3 *2 *3  
Preset  
speed 3  
FM/OUT2  
CC  
CC  
Frequency meter  
(Ammeter)  
Meter  
Ry  
1-phase series  
MCCB  
R/L1  
S/L2  
Power  
supply  
1-phase series do not have T/L3 terminal.  
*1: Only European model has a built-in noise filter.  
*2: The terminal can be switched between FM/OUT and VI/S3 by changing a  
parameter.  
*3: The terminal can also be used as an input terminal by changing a parameter.  
*4: To use VI/S3 terminal as an input terminal, P15 and VI/S3 must be short-  
circuited with a resistor (recommended resistance: 4.7k-1/4W).  
*5: European models are not provided with PO terminal.  
*6: 1-phase 100V models cannot be used with DC reactors.  
B-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
2.2.2  
Standard connection diagram (2)  
(2) Source <common: P15>  
When using V1/S3 terminal as an analog input terminal (Hꢀꢁꢂ : or )  
5  
2
DC reactor  
(DCL: option)  
4  
P0  
PA  
PC  
MCCB  
1  
R/L1  
S/L2  
T/L3  
U/T1  
V/T2  
W/T3  
Main circuit  
IM  
FLC  
F
R
Forward  
Reverse  
Control circuit  
FLB  
FLA  
Fault output signal  
S1  
S2  
P15  
Preset speed 1  
P5  
VF-nC1  
 *  
3
Connector for  
optional devices  
External potentiometer  
(3-10k)  
or input voltage signal  
(0-10Vdc)  
Preset speed 2  
Common  
VI/S3  
CC  
2
Current signal  
4-20mAdc  
FM/OUT2  
CC  
Frequency meter  
(Ammeter)  
Meter  
Ry  
1-phase series  
MCCB  
R/L1  
S/L2  
Power  
supply  
1-phase series do not have T/L3 terminal.  
*1: Only European model has a built-in noise filter.  
*2: The terminal can be switched between FM/OUT and VI/S3 by changing a  
parameter.  
*3: The terminal can also be used as an input terminal by changing a parameter.  
*4: European models are not provided with PO terminal.  
*5: 1-phase 100V models cannot be used with DC reactors.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comB.-5All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
When using V1/S3 terminal as a logic input terminal (Hꢀꢁꢂ : )  
5  
DC reactor  
(DCL: option)  
2
4  
P0  
PA  
PC  
MCCB  
1  
R/L1  
S/L2  
T/L3  
U/T1  
V/T2  
W/T3  
Main circuit  
IM  
FLC  
FLB  
FLA  
F
R
Forward  
Reverse  
Control circuit  
Fault output signal  
S1  
S2  
P15  
Preset speed 1  
Preset speed 2  
Common  
VF-nC1  
Connector for  
optional devices  
*
*
3
VI/S3  
2
Preset  
speed 3  
FM/OUT2  
CC  
Frequency meter  
(Ammeter)  
Meter  
Ry  
1-phase series  
R/L1  
S/L2  
Power  
supply  
1-phase series do not have T/L3 terminal.  
*1: Only European model has a built-in noise filter.  
*2: The terminal can be switched between FM/OUT and VI/S3 by changing a  
parameter.  
*3: The terminal can also be used as an input terminal by changing a parameter.  
*4: European models are not provided with PO terminal.  
*5: 1-phase 100V models cannot be used with DC reactors.  
B-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
2.3  
Description of terminals  
2.3.1  
Main circuit terminals  
This diagram shows an example of wiring of the main circuit. Use options if necessary.  
Power supply and motor connections  
2
Power  
supply  
VF-nC1  
Powerlines are  
Motorlines are connected  
connected to R, S and T. to U, V and W.  
Motor  
or  
or  
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3  
U/T1 V/T2W/T3  
No-fuse  
breaker  
E
Connections with peripheral equipment  
Magnetic  
contactor  
Noise reduction  
filter  
No-fuse  
breaker  
Input  
reactor  
Motor  
/T1  
R/L1  
S/L2  
Inverter  
PO  
Power  
supply  
/T2  
IM  
/T3  
T/L3  
Zero-phase  
reactor  
PC/- PA/+  
DC reactor  
Main circuit  
Terminal symbol  
Terminal function  
Grounding terminal for connecting inverter case. 2 grounding terminals.  
100V class: 1-phase 100V to 115V - 50/60Hz  
200V class: 1-phase 200V to 240V - 50/60Hz, 3-phase 200V-240V - 50/60Hz  
*1-phase series have R/L1 and S/L2 terminal.  
R/L1, S/L2,  
T/L3  
U/T1, V/T2,  
W/T3  
Connect to a (3-phase induction) motor  
PC/-  
This is a negative potential terminal in the internal DC main circuit.  
Terminals for connecting a DC reactor (DCL: optional external device).  
Shorted when shipped from the factory. Before installing DCL remove the short  
bar.  
PO, PA/+  
1-phase 100V models cannot be used with DC reactors. 1-phase 200V models  
for Europe are not provided with PO terminal.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comB.-7All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
2.3.2  
Control circuit terminals (sink logic (common: CC))  
The control circuit terminal board is the same for all models.  
2
Termina Input/  
l symbol output  
Function  
Specifications  
Inverter internal circuit  
Shorting across F-CC  
causes forward rotation;  
open causes slowdown and  
stop. (If ST is always ON)  
Shorting across R-CC  
causes reverse rotation;  
open causes slowdown and  
stop. (If ST is always ON)  
Shorting across R-CC/F-  
CC causes reverse  
rotation.  
F
Input  
+15V  
Dry contact input  
15Vdc - 5mA or less  
*Sink/source selectable  
by changing a parameter  
+5V  
R
Input  
4.7K  
3.7K  
F
Shorting across S1-CC  
causes preset speed  
operation.  
Shorting across S2-CC  
causes preset speed  
operation.  
S
2
0.047μ  
22K  
1K  
S1  
S2  
CC  
Input  
Input  
CC◎  
Common  
to input/  
output  
Control circuit’s equipotential  
terminal.  
+5V  
5Vdc  
100  
Power output for analog input  
setting.  
P5  
Output  
(permissible load current: P5  
10mAdc)  
Multifunction programmable  
analog input.  
Standard default setting:  
Analog input 0-10Vdc and  
+5V  
10Vdc:  
(internal impedance:  
42k)  
4-20mA:  
(internal impedance:  
20K  
2K  
VI/S3  
0.047μ  
20K  
249  
VI/S3  
Input frequency 0-80Hz.  
Possible to use as analog input  
0.047μ  
(4 (0)-20mAdc) or contact input  
(programmable contact input)  
by changing a parameter.  
250)  
B-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Termina Input/  
l symbol output  
Function  
Specifications  
Inverter internal circuit  
Multifunction programmable  
output.  
+15V  
Standard default setting:  
output frequency.  
Meters connectable to  
FM/OUT: 1mAdc full-scale  
1mA full-scale  
DC ammeter or 7.5Vdc  
(10Vdc) full-scale  
DC voltmeter  
+15V  
FM/  
OUT  
Output ammeter or 7.5Vdc (10Vdc) -  
1mA full-scale voltmeter (PWM  
output).  
3.4K  
FM/OUT◎  
2
Open collector output:  
24Vdc-50mA  
47  
Possible to switch to  
programmable open collector  
output by changing a  
parameter.  
+15V  
P15  
Output 15Vdc power output.  
15Vdc-100mA  
P15  
Multifunction programmable  
relay contact output. Contact  
ratings: 250Vac - 2A (cosφ=1),  
30Vdc - 1A, 250Vac - 1A  
+15V  
FL  
FLA ◎  
FLB  
250Vac-2A  
(cosφ=1):  
at resistance load  
30Vdc-1A  
FLA  
FLB  
FLC  
(cosφ=0.4). Standard default  
FLC ◎  
Output  
setting: Monitoring of status of  
inverter’s protection function.  
Activation of the protection  
function causes circuit FLA-  
FLC to close and circuit FLB-  
FLC to open.  
100  
250Vac-1A (cosφ=0.4)  
Sink logic (negative common)/source logic (positive common)  
⋅⋅⋅ Logic switching of input output terminals  
Current flowing out turns control input terminals on. These are called sink logic terminals. (For all  
models except models with a built-in noise filter, control input terminals are factory-set to sink  
logic.) The general used method in Europe is source logic in which current flowing into the input  
terminal turns it on.  
Sink logic  
Source logic  
15VDC  
Common P15  
15VDC  
Input  
Input  
Output  
F
Output  
F
Common  
CC  
Programmable  
controller  
Programmable  
controller  
Inverter  
Inverter  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comB.-9All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Output terminals cannot be switched between sink logic and source logic.  
See the figures below for connection to sink logic and source logic terminals.  
Sink logic  
Source logic  
+Power supply  
15VDC  
P15  
Input  
FM/OUT  
2
Input  
FM/OUT  
Common  
CC  
Common  
CC  
Programmable  
controller  
Programmable  
controller  
Inverter  
Inverter  
Switching the input terminal logic between sink and source  
Input terminals of the VF-nC1 inverter can be switched between sink logic and source logic, using  
the Hꢀꢃꢄ parameter.  
When switching between sink logic and source logic, do it before connecting cables to inverter’s  
control circuit terminals. When the confirmation message Gꢀꢁ or Gꢀꢂ is displayed after  
switching between sink logic and source logic, using the Hꢀꢃꢄ parameter, reset the inverter,  
using the operation panel, by turning the power off, or by inputting a reset signal from an external  
control device.  
Switching the VI/S3 terminal between logic input and analog input  
The VI/S3 terminal of the VF-nC1 inverter can be switched between contact input and analog  
input by changing a parameter setting. When switching between contact input and analog input,  
do it before connecting cables to inverter’s control circuit terminals (Hꢀꢁꢂ).  
If switching between contact input and analog input is done after cable connection, the inverter  
and/or the external device connected might be damaged. Before turning on the inverter, make  
sure all cables are connected correctly to the control terminals.  
When using the VI/S3 terminal as an contact input terminal (sink logic), be sure to insert a  
resistor* between the P15 and VI/S3 terminals. (Recommended resistance: 4.7k-1/4W).  
Switching the FM/OUT terminal between meter output (PWM output) and open  
collector output  
The FM/OUT terminal of the VF-nC1 inverter can be switched between meter output (PWM  
output) and open collector output.  
When switching between meter output (PWM output) and open collector output, do it before  
connecting an external device to the inverter. After switching from meter output (PWM output) to  
open collector output, and vice versa, check using the HOUN parameter to be sure that the  
desired function is assigned to the FM/OUT terminal, and then turn the power off. After the  
completion of cable connection, turn the power back on. If switching between meter output and  
open collector output is done after cable connection, the inverter might be damaged.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.cBo-1m0 . All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
3. Simple operation  
  Danger  
Do not touch inverter terminals when electrical power is connected to the inverter  
even if the motor is stopped.  
Touching the inverter terminals while power is connected to it may result in electric  
shock.  
Prohibited  
Do not touch switches when the hands are wet and do not try to clean the inverter  
with a damp cloth. Such practices may result in electric shock.  
Do not go near the motor in alarm-stop status when the retry function is selected.  
The motor may suddenly restart and that could result in injury.  
Take measures for safety, e.g. attaching a cover to the motor, against accidents  
when the motor unexpectedly restarts.  
3
Turn power on only after attaching the front cover or closing door if enclosed in a  
cabinet.  
If power is turned on without the front cover attached or closing door if enclosed in  
a cabinet, that may result in electric shock or other injury.  
If the inverter begins to emit smoke or an unusual odor, or unusual sounds,  
immediately turn power off.  
Mandatory  
If the equipment is continued in operation in such a state, the result may be fire.  
Call your local sales agency for repairs.  
Always turn power off if the inverter is not used for long periods of time.  
Turn input power on after attaching the front cover.  
When enclosed inside a cabinet and using with the front cover removed, always  
close the cabinet doors first and then turn power on. If the power is turned on with  
the front cover or the cabinet doors open, it may result in electric shock.  
Make sure that operation signals are off before resetting the inverter after  
malfunction.  
If the inverter is reset before turning off the operating signal, the motor may restart  
suddenly causing injury.  
Warning  
Do not touch heat radiating fins. These devices are hot, and you'll get burned if you  
touch them.  
Contact  
prohibited  
Always observe the permissible operating ranges of motors and other equipment  
(see the instruction manual for the motor).  
If these ranges are not observed, it could result in injury.  
Prohibited  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comC.-1All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
3.1  
Simple operation of the VF-nC1  
The procedures for setting operation frequency and the methods of operation can be selected from  
the following.  
Run / stop  
:
:
(1) Run and stop from the operation panel  
(2) Run and stop using external signals to the terminal  
block  
(3) Run and stop by serial communications (with an  
optional external device)  
3
Frequency  
setting  
(1) Setting of frequency using the potentiometer on the  
inverter main unit  
(2) Frequency setting using the UP and DOWN keys on  
the operation panel  
(3) Setting of frequency using external signals to the  
terminal block (0-10Vdc, 4-20mAdc)  
(4) Frequency setting by serial communications (with  
an optional external device)  
Use the basic parameters EOQF (command mode selection) and HOQF (frequency setting mode  
selection) for selecting.  
Title  
Function  
Command mode  
selection  
Adjustment range  
0: Terminal block 1: Operation panel  
Default setting  
1
EOQF  
Frequency setting  
mode selection  
0: Terminal block  
1: Operation panel  
2
HOQF  
2: Internal potentiometer  
3: Serial communications  
4: Terminal block/potentiometer switching  
[Steps in setting parameters]  
Key operated  
LED display  
Operation  
Displays the operation frequency (operation stopped). (When  
standard monitor display selection Hꢂꢃꢀ=is set to  
[Operation frequency])  
ꢀꢁꢀ  
CWJ  
The first basic parameter "History (CWJ)" is displayed.  
MON  
Press either the key or the key to select "EOQF."  
EOQF  
Press the ENTER key to display the parameter setting.  
ENT  
(Standard default setting:  
)
Change the parameter to (Terminal board) by pressing the △  
key.  
ꢀ¶¶EOQF  
HOQF  
Press the ENTER key to save the changed parameter. EOQF  
and the parameter set value are displayed alternately.  
ENT  
ENT  
ENT  
Press either the key or the key to select "HOQF."  
Press the ENTER key to display the parameter setting.  
(Standard default setting: )  
Change the parameter to  
key  
(Operation panel) by pressing the  
Press the ENTER key to save the changed parameter. HOQF  
and the parameter set value are displayed alternately.  
ꢃ¶HOQF  
*
Pressing the MON key twice returns the display to standard monitor mode (displaying operation  
frequency).  
C-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
3.1.1  
How to start and stop  
(1) Start and stop using the operation panel keys (EOQF  
:
)  
STOP  
keys on the operation panel to start and stop the motor.  
RUN  
Use the  
RUN  
and  
 : Motor starts.  
STOP  
 : Motor stops (slowdown stop).  
3
(2) Start and stop using external signals to the terminal board (EOQF : )  
Use external signals to the inverter terminal board to start and stop the motor. (Sink logic  
connection)  
Short F and CC terminals: run forward  
Coast stop  
The standard default setting is for slowdown  
stop. To make a coast stop, assign an ST  
terminal function to an idle terminal using the  
programmable terminal function.  
For coast stop, open the ST-CC when stopping  
the motor in the state described at left. The  
monitor on the inverter at this time will display  
QHH.  
Open F and CC terminals: slow down and stop  
Slowdown stop  
Frequency  
Motor  
Coast stop  
speed  
ON  
OFF  
F-CC  
ON  
OFF  
F-CC  
ON  
OFF  
ST-CC  
3.1.2  
How to set the frequency  
(1) Setting the frequency using the potentiometer on the inverter main unit  
(HOQF : )  
Set the frequency with the notches on the potentiometer.  
Move clockwise through the higher notches for the higher frequencies.  
Since the potentiometer has hysteresis, it settings may change to some  
degree after the power is turned off and turned back on.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comC.-3All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
(2) Setting the frequency using the operation panel (HOQF : )  
Set the frequency from the operation panel.  
: Moves the frequency up  
ً
ٕ
: Moves the frequency down  
Example of operating a run from the panel  
Key operated  
LED display  
Operation  
3
Displays the operation frequency.  
(When standard monitor display selection Hꢂꢃꢀ=is set to 0  
ꢀꢁꢀ  
[operation frequency])  
Set the operation frequency.  
ꢅꢀꢁꢀ  
ꢅꢀꢁꢀHE  
ꢆꢀꢁꢀ  
Press the ENTER key to save the operation frequency setting.  
HE and the frequency are displayed alternately.  
ENT  
Pressing the key or the key will change the operation  
frequency even during operation.  
*
Press the ENTER key after changing the operation frequency, otherwise it will not be saved,  
although it is displayed.  
(3) Setting the frequency using external signals to the terminal board (HOQF : )  
Frequency setting  
1) Setting the frequency using external potentiometer  
Potentiometer control  
Set frequency using the potentiometer  
(3-10k-1/4W)  
P5  
MAX  
MIN  
*1  
For more detailed information on  
adjustments, see 6.4.  
VI/S3  
CC  
:
Setting frequency using  
the potentiometer  
60Hz  
Frequency  
0
MIN  
MAX  
The Hꢃꢀꢇ parameter (VI/S3 terminal function selection) is used to specify a function  
for the VI/S3 input terminal. The FCHG parameter (frequency command forced  
switching) makes it possible to use both the analog input frequency signal and the  
frequency signal set with the internal potentiometer, which can be switched by  
activating or deactivating the input terminals.  
See 5.1 for details.  
*1It is necessary to set the Hꢄꢀꢈ (=4750approx.) in case of using the potentiometer  
with P5.  
Note: The current input and voltage input functions cannot be used at the same time.  
C-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
2) Setting the frequency using input voltage (0-10V)  
Voltage signal  
Setting frequency using voltage signals  
(0-10V). For more detailed information  
on adjustments, see 6.4.  
+
-
VI/S3  
CC  
: Voltage signal 0-10Vdc  
60Hz  
Frequency  
0
0Vdc  
10Vdc  
*
The Hꢃꢀꢇ parameter (VI/S3 terminal function selection) is used to specify a function  
for the VI/S3 input terminal. The FCHG parameter (frequency command forced  
switching) makes it possible to use both the analog input frequency signal and the  
frequency signal set with the internal potentiometer, which can be switched by  
activating or deactivating the input terminals.  
3
See 5.1 for details.  
Note: The current input and voltage input functions cannot be used at the same time.  
3) Setting the frequency using current input (4-20mA)  
Current signal  
+
Setting frequency using current signals  
(4-20mA). For more detailed information  
on adjustments, see 6.4.  
VI/S3  
CC  
: Current signal 4-20mAdc  
-
60Hz  
Frequency  
0
4mAdc  
20mAdc  
*
The Hꢃꢀꢇ parameter (VI/S3 terminal function selection) is used to specify a function  
for the VI/S3 input terminal. The FCHG parameter (frequency command forced  
switching) makes it possible to use both the analog input frequency signal and the  
frequency signal set with the internal potentiometer, which can be switched by  
activating or deactivating the input terminals.  
See 5.1 for details.  
Note: The current input and voltage input functions cannot be used at the same time.  
(4) Setting the frequency by serial communications (HOQF  
:
)  
The frequency can also be set from a higher-order external control device via optionally available  
communications conversion units (RS2001Z, RS20035, RS2002Z and RS4001Z).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comC.-5All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
4. Basic VF-nC1 operations  
The VF-nC1 has the following three monitor modes.  
Standard monitor mode : The standard inverter mode. This mode is enabled when  
inverter power goes on.  
After mode is for monitoring the output frequency and setting the frequency  
designated value by UP/DOWN key of operation panel. In it is also displayed  
information about status alarms during running and trips.  
Setting frequency designated values - see 3.1.2  
Status alarm  
4
If there is an error in the inverter, the alarm signal and the frequency will flash  
alternately in the LED display.  
E : When a current flows at or higher than the overcurrent stall level.  
R : When a voltage is generated at or higher than the over voltage stall  
level.  
N : When a load reaches 50% or higher of the overload trip value.  
J : When temperature inside the inverter rises to the overheating protection  
alarm level.  
All VF-nC1 series of inverters: About 110°C  
Setting monitor mode  
:
:
The mode for setting inverter parameters.  
For more on how to set parameters, see 4.1.  
 Status monitor mode  
The mode for monitoring all inverter status.  
Allows monitoring of set frequencies, output current/voltage and  
terminal information.  
For more on how to use the monitor, see 8.1.  
Pressing the  
key will move the inverter through each of the modes.  
MON  
Standard monitor mode  
MON  
MON  
Status monitor mode  
Setting monitor mode  
MON  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comD.-1All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Setting monitor mode  
4.1  
How to set parameters  
The standard default parameters are programmed before the unit is shipped from the factory.  
Parameters can be divided into three major categories. Select the parameter to be changed or to be  
searched and retrieved.  
Setup parameters  
:
Parameters necessary for specifying a logic for control input signals  
and a base frequency for the motor when turning on the inverter for  
the first time.  
This parameter setting is needed only for the VFNC1 (S)-□□□□PW.  
Parameters necessary for operating the inverter.  
4
Basic parameters  
Extended parameters  
Special parameters  
:
:
:
Parameters necessary for using various extended functions.  
Parameters necessary for using special functions. Three special  
parameters are included in the basic parameters of the VF-nC1.  
*1: Three special parameters  
CWH : Calls up only functions necessary to meet the user’s needs and, sets up the inverter.  
CWJ : Displays the five parameters changed last in reverse order of change. This parameter comes  
in very handy when readjusting inverter, using the same parameters.  
ITꢀW : Displays parameters whose settings are different from the factory default settings. Use this  
parameter to check settings you made or you want to change.  
Adjustment range of parameters  
JK: An attempt has been made to assign a value that is higher than the programmable range. Or,  
as a result of changing other parameters, the programmed value of the parameter that is now  
selected exceeds the upper limit.  
NQ: An attempt has been made to assign a value that is lower than the programmable range. Or,  
as a result of changing other parameters, the programmed value of the parameter that is now  
selected exceeds the lower limit.  
If the above alarm is flashing on and off, no setting can be done of values that are equal to or greater  
than JK or equal to or lower than NQ.  
While these codes are flashing on and off, no change can be made to any parameter.  
D-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
4.1.1  
How to set a setup parameter  
Setup parameter  
After you set the basic parameter V[R to (Initialize to default setting) or the first power, the  
inverter will be in setup parameter mode. When the inverter is in this mode, you need to set a  
setup parameter, as described below, to make the inverter ready for operation.  
Set the setup parameter according to the logic for control input signals used and the base frequency  
of the motor connected. (If you are not sure which setup parameter should be selected among  
Pꢁꢂ, Rꢁꢂ and Pꢃꢂ and what values should be specified, consult your reseller.)  
Each setup parameter automatically sets all parameters relating to the logic for control input signals  
used and the base frequency of the motor connected.  
4
This parameter setting is needed only for the VFNC1 (S)-□□□□P-W.  
Follow these steps to change the setup parameter [Example: Changing from Pꢁꢂ to Pꢀꢁ: sink  
logic (negative common) and a base frequency of 60Hz]  
Key operated  
LED display  
Operation  
Pꢁꢂ  
Turn the power on.  
Select a parameter among Pꢁꢂ, Rꢃꢂ and Pꢃꢂ, using  
Pꢃꢂ  
KP KV  
ꢂꢀꢂ  
the and keys. Select Pꢃꢂ in this case.  
Press the ENTER key to confirm your change.  
When KP KV is displayed, you can set the setup  
parameter.  
ENT  
The operation frequency is displayed (Standby).  
You can change this parameter setting. To do so, you need to reset the basic parameter V[R  
to (default setting).  
You can also change the parameters in the table below individually even after setting a setup  
parameter.  
The settings of the parameters listed below are changed by the setup parameter.  
When you search for I4W parameters, only the parameters in the shaded area will be displayed  
as changed parameters.  
Values set by each setup parameter  
Parameters set  
Pꢁꢂ  
Rꢁꢂ  
Pꢃꢂ  
(Mainly in Asia)  
(Mainly in Europe)  
(Mainly in North America)  
Hꢄꢅꢆ  
0
[Sink logic (negative common)] 100 (Source logic (positive common))  
0
[Sink logic (negative common)]  
Hꢇꢂꢈ / Hꢄꢆꢄ 220 (V)  
220 (V)  
230 (V)  
Hꢇꢄꢆ  
1410 (min-1  
)
1410 (min-1  
50.0 (Hz)  
50.0 (Hz)  
)
1710 (min-1  
60.0 (Hz)  
60.0 (Hz)  
)
HJ, WN, Hꢅꢂꢇ 50.0 (Hz)  
XN / Hꢄꢆꢂ  
50.0 (Hz)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comD.-3All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
4.1.2  
How to set the basic parameters  
Basic parameters  
All of the basic parameters can be set by the same step procedures.  
[Steps in key entry for basic parameters]  
Select a parameter you want to  
change from the table of  
parameters.  
MON  
: Switches to the setting monitor mode.  
: Selects parameter to be changed.  
If there is something that you do  
not understand during the  
operation, press the MON key to  
return to the ꢂꢀꢂ indication (or  
operation frequency).  
See 11.2 for the table of basic  
parameters.  
4
ENT  
: Reads the programmed parameter setting.  
: Changes the parameter setting.  
ENT  
: Saves the changed value of the parameter setting.  
Steps in setting are as follows (the example shown is one of changing the maximum frequency from  
80Hz to 60Hz).  
Key operated  
LED display  
Operation  
Displays the operation frequency (operation stopped).  
(When standard monitor display selection Hꢆꢄꢂ=is set  
to 0 [operation frequency]).  
ꢂꢀꢂ  
MON  
CWJ  
HJ  
The first basic parameter "History (CWJ)" is displayed.  
Press either the  
key or the  
key to select "HJ".  
ENT  
ꢊꢂꢀꢂ  
ꢃꢂꢀꢂ  
Pressing the ENTER key reads the maximum frequency.  
Press the  
60Hz.  
key to change the maximum frequency to  
Press the ENTER key to save the changed maximum  
frequency. HJ and frequency are displayed alternately.  
ENT  
ꢃꢂꢀꢂ  
HJ  
After this,  
Displays the same  
programmed  
parameter.  
Switches to the  
display in the status  
monitor mode.  
Displays names  
of other  
parameters.  
ENT  
MON  
D-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
4.1.3  
How to set extended parameters  
The VF-nC1 has extended parameters to allow you to make full use of its functions. All extended  
parameters are expressed with H and three digits.  
HꢄꢂꢂHꢄꢆꢉ  
HꢅꢂꢂHꢅꢈꢇ  
ENT  
Basic parameter  
HꢉꢂꢂHꢉꢃꢉ  
H---  
HꢇꢂꢂHꢇꢄꢈ  
HꢁꢂꢂHꢁꢂꢁ  
HꢃꢂꢂHꢃꢉꢉ  
HꢆꢂꢂHꢆꢄꢂ  
HꢊꢂꢂHꢊꢊꢂ  
MON  
4
Press the MON key once and use the  
key and the ٕ key to select “H---“ from  
the basic parameters.  
ً
Press the ً key and the ٕ key to  
select the parameter to be  
changed. Then, press the ENTER  
key to display the set parameter.  
[Steps in key entry for extended parameters]  
MON  
: Switches to the setting monitor mode. (displays CWJ)  
See 11.3 for the table of extended  
parameters.  
ً
ً
ً
ٕ
ٕ
ٕ
: Selects "H---" from basic parameters.  
ENT  
: Displays the first extended parameter.  
: Selects the extended parameter to be changed.  
: Reads the programmed parameter setting.  
ENT  
: Changes the parameter setting.  
ENT  
: Saves the changed value of the extended parameter setting.  
MON  
ENT  
key moves back to the previous status.  
Pressing the  
key instead of the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comD.-5All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Example of parameter setting  
The steps in setting are as follows. (Example of changing the starting frequency selection  
Hꢅꢇꢂ from ꢋꢁ to ꢌꢂ.)  
Key operated  
LED display  
Operation  
Displays the operation frequency (operation stopped).  
(When standard monitor display selection Hꢆꢄꢂ=is set to  
[operation frequency])  
ꢂꢀꢂ  
MON  
CWJ  
Hꢍꢍꢍ  
Hꢄꢂꢂ  
Hꢅꢇꢂ  
ꢂꢀꢁ  
The first basic parameter "History (CWJ)" is displayed.  
Press either the  
parameter group H  
key or the  
.
key to change to the  
Press the ENTER key to display the first extended parameter  
Hꢄꢂꢂ.  
ENT  
ENT  
ENT  
4
Press the  
key to change to the dynamic braking selection  
Hꢅꢇꢂ.  
Pressing the ENTER key allows the reading of parameter  
setting.  
Press the  
key to change the dynamic braking selection  
ꢄꢀꢂ  
from 0.5Hz to 1.0Hz  
Pressing the ENTER key alternately flashes on and off the  
ꢄꢀꢂꢎHꢅꢇꢂ parameter and changed value and allows the save of those  
values.  
If there is anything you do not understand during this operation, press the  
key several  
MON  
times to start over from the step of CWJ display.  
4.1.4  
How to set (use) special parameters  
(1) Setting a parameter, using the wizard function (CWH)  
Wizard function (CWH):  
The wizard function refers to the special function of calling up only functions necessary to set up  
the inverter in response to the user’s needs. When a purpose-specific wizard is selected, a group  
of parameters needed for the specified application (function) is formed and the inverter is switched  
automatically to the mode of setting the group of parameters selected. You can set up the inverter  
easily by simply setting the parameters in the group one after another. The wizard function (CWH)  
provides four purpose-specific wizards.  
Title  
CWH  
Function  
Wizard function  
Adjustment range  
Default setting  
0
0 : -  
1 : Basic setting wizard  
2 : Preset speed operation wizard  
3 : Analog signal operation wizard  
4 : Motor 1/2 switching operation wizard  
5 : Torque up wizard*  
*
This parameter is valid only for VFNC1 (S)-□□□□P-W type.  
D-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
How to use the wizard function  
Here are the steps to follow to set parameters, using the wizard function. (When the basic setting  
wizard (CWH) is set to 1)  
Key operated  
LED display  
Operation  
Displays the operation frequency (operation stopped).  
(When standard monitor display selection Hꢆꢄꢂ=is set to  
0 [operation frequency]).  
ꢂꢀꢂ  
MON  
CWJ  
CWH  
The first basic parameter "History (CWJ)" is displayed.  
Select the wizard function (CWH) by pressing the or ▽  
key.  
ENT  
ENT  
Press the ENTER key to confirm your choice. is displayed.  
4
Switch to purpose-specific wizard by pressing the or ▽  
key.  
Press the ENTER key to confirm your choice. The first  
parameter in the purpose-specific wizard parameter group is  
displayed. (See Table below)  
EOQF  
After moving to the purpose-specific wizard parameter group,  
change the setting of each parameter by pressing the or ▽  
key and the ENTER key.  
       
****  
GPF is dialyzed on completion of the setting of the wizard  
parameter group.  
      
GPF  
Display of  
parameter  
CWH  
MON  
MON  
MON  
Press the MON key to exit the wizard parameter group.  
By pressing the MON key, you can return to the default  
monitoring mode (display of operation frequency).  
HTꢍH  
ꢂꢀꢂ  
If there is anything you do not understand during this operation, press the  
key several  
MON  
times to start over from the step of CWJ display.  
JGCF or GPF is affixed respectively to the first or last parameter in each wizard parameter group.  
Table of parameters that can be changed using the wizard function  
Analog input operation  
wizard  
Motor 2 switching operation  
wizard  
Basic setting wizard  
Preset-speed setting wizard  
Torque UP wizard*  
EOQF  
EOQF  
HOQF  
CEE  
FGE  
HJ  
EOQF  
Hꢄꢄꢄ  
Hꢄꢄꢅ  
Hꢄꢄꢉ  
Hꢄꢄꢇ  
XN  
Hꢇꢂꢈ  
XD  
Hꢇꢄꢁ  
VJT  
XN  
RV  
Hꢇꢂꢄ  
Hꢇꢂꢈ  
Hꢇꢄꢁ  
Hꢇꢄꢆ  
HOQF  
CEE  
FGE  
HJ  
WN  
XN  
HOQF  
CEE  
FGE  
HJ  
WN  
NN  
Hꢄꢂꢈ  
Hꢅꢂꢄ  
Hꢅꢂꢅ  
Hꢅꢂꢉ  
Hꢅꢂꢇ  
WN  
Hꢄꢂꢈ  
Hꢄꢄꢄ  
Hꢄꢄꢅ  
Hꢄꢄꢉ  
Hꢄꢄꢇ  
Hꢄꢄꢁ  
UTꢄ  
UTꢅ  
UTꢉ  
UTꢇ  
UTꢁ  
Hꢇꢂꢈ  
CEE  
FGE  
Hꢄꢆꢂ  
Hꢄꢆꢄ  
Hꢄꢆꢅ  
Hꢄꢆꢉ  
Hꢁꢂꢂ  
Hꢁꢂꢄ  
UTꢃ  
UTꢆ  
Hꢅꢊꢆ  
Hꢅꢊꢊ  
Hꢅꢊꢈ  
Hꢅꢈꢂ  
Hꢅꢈꢄ  
Hꢅꢈꢅ  
Hꢅꢈꢉ  
Hꢅꢈꢇ  
*
This parameter is valid only for VFNC1 (S)-□□□□P-W type.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comD.-7All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
(2) Searching for a history of changes, using the history function (CWJ)  
History function (CWJ)  
The history function automatically searches for the five parameters set or changed last and displays  
them in reverse order of setting or change. This parameter can also be used to set or change  
parameters.  
Notes  
Parameters set or changed using the setup parameter also are included among parameters  
displayed.  
JGCF and GPF are added respectively to the first and last parameters in a history of  
changes.  
4
How to use the history function  
Key operated  
LED display  
Operation  
Displays the operation frequency (operation stopped).  
(When standard monitor display selection Hꢆꢄꢂ=is set to  
0 [operation frequency]).  
ꢂꢀꢂ  
MON  
ENT  
ENT  
CWJ  
uCEE  
ꢊꢀꢂ  
The first basic parameter "History (CWJ)" is displayed.  
Press the ENTER key to search for and display the next  
parameter set or changed last.  
Press the ENTER key to display the setting of the parameter  
found.  
ꢁꢀꢂ  
Change the setting by pressing the or key.  
Press the ENTER key to confirm the new setting. The name  
and new setting of the parameter are displayed alternately  
and the setting is saved.  
ENT  
ꢁꢀꢂCEE  
Similarly, press the or key to display the parameter  
you want to set or change next, and change and confirm the  
setting.  
    (   )  
****  
On completion of a search for all parameters, GPF is  
displayed again.  
    (   )  
GPF  
Display of parameter  
MON  
CWJ  
HTꢍH  
ꢂꢀꢂ  
To abort the search operation, press the MON key. Press the  
MON key once during a search to return to setting mode.  
Similarly, by pressing the MON key, you can go back to the  
status monitor mode and default monitor mode (display of  
operation frequency).  
MON  
MON  
D-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
(3) Searching for and changing parameters, using the user parameter group  
function ITꢀW  
User parameter group function (ITꢀW):  
The user parameter group function automatically searches for only parameters whose settings are  
different from the factory default settings, and displays them as ITꢀW parameters. This parameter  
can also be used to set and change parameters in ITꢀW.  
Notes  
Parameters that have been returned to their factory default settings are not displayed as  
ITꢀW parameters.  
Parameters that have been set using the setup parameter are also displayed as ITꢀW  
parameters.  
4
How to search for and change parameters  
Follow the steps below to search for and change parameters.  
Key operated  
LED display  
Operation  
Displays the operation frequency (operation stopped).  
(When standard monitor display selection Hꢆꢄꢂ=is  
set to 0 [operation frequency]).  
ꢂꢀꢂ  
MON  
CWJ  
ITꢀW  
The first basic parameter "History (CWJ)" is displayed.  
Select ITꢀW by pressing  
or  
key.  
Press the ENTER key to enter the user parameter search/  
setting change mode.  
ENT  
Wꢍꢍꢍ  
Parameters whose settings are different from the factory  
default setting are searched for and displayed. To change  
WꢍꢍH  
WꢍꢍT)  
u
ENT  
or  
the parameter displayed, press the ENTER key or the  
key. (Press the  
direction.)  
key to make a search in the reverse  
CEE  
ENT  
ꢊꢀꢂ  
ꢁꢀꢂ  
Press the ENTER key to display the setting.  
Change the setting by pressing the or key.  
Press the ENTER key to confirm the new setting. The  
name and new setting of the parameter are displayed  
alternately, and the setting is saved.  
ENT  
ꢁꢀꢂCEE  
Similarly, press the  
you want to set or change next, and change and confirm  
the setting.  
or  
key to display the parameter  
WꢍꢍH  
WꢍꢍT)  
    (   )  
On completion of a search for all parameters, ITꢀW is  
displayed again.  
    (   )  
ITꢀW  
Display of parameter  
To abort the search operation, press the MON key. Press  
the MON key once during a search to return to the setting  
mode.  
Similarly, by pressing the MON key, you can go back to the  
status monitor mode and default monitor mode (display of  
operation frequency).  
MON  
HTꢍH  
MON  
ꢂꢀꢂ  
If you feel puzzled as to how to operate, press the  
key several times to go back to the  
MON  
step where CWJ is displayed, and perform these steps all over again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comD.-9All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
4.1.5  
Parameters that cannot be changed while running  
For reasons of safety, the following parameters have been set up so that they cannot be  
reprogrammed while the inverter is running.  
[Basic parameters]  
EOQF (Command mode selection)  
Set Hꢆꢂꢂ, and EOQF and HOQF can be changed  
HOQF (Frequency setting mode selection)  
V[R (Standard setting mode selection)  
while the inverter is running.  
Hꢅꢁꢄ (DC braking current (%))  
Hꢉꢂꢂ (PWM carrier frequency)  
Hꢉꢂꢄ (Auto-restart control selection)  
Hꢉꢂꢅ (Regenerative power ride-though  
control)  
HJ  
XN  
RV  
(Maximum frequency (Hz))  
(Base frequency 1 (Hz))  
(V/f control mode selection)  
[Extended parameters]  
Hꢄꢂꢈ(Analog input/logic input function  
selection)  
Hꢉꢂꢁ (Over voltage limit operation)  
Hꢇꢂꢄ (Slip frequency gain)  
Hꢇꢂꢈ (Base frequency voltage 1 (V))  
Hꢇꢄꢁ (Motor rated current)  
Hꢇꢄꢃ (Motor no-load current)  
Hꢇꢄꢆ (Motor rated speed)  
Hꢇꢄꢊ (Speed control gain)  
Hꢇꢄꢈ (Speed control stable coefficient)  
Hꢃꢂꢄ (Stall prevention level)  
Hꢃꢂꢉ (External input trip stop mode  
selection)  
4
Hꢄꢄꢂ (Always active function selection (ST))  
Hꢄꢄꢄ (Input terminal selection 1 (F))  
Hꢄꢄꢅ (Input terminal selection 2 (R))  
Hꢄꢄꢉ (Input terminal selection 3 (S1))  
Hꢄꢄꢇ (Input terminal selection 4 (S2))  
Hꢄꢄꢁ (Input terminal selection 5 (VI/S3))  
Hꢄꢅꢆ (Sink/Source selection)  
Hꢄꢉꢂ (Output terminal selection 1 (OUT/FM))  
Hꢄꢉꢅ (Output terminal selection 3 (FL))  
Hꢄꢆꢂ (Base frequency 2 (Hz))  
Hꢃꢂꢊ (Input phase failure detection  
mode selection)  
Hꢄꢆꢄ (Base frequency voltage 2 (V))  
Hꢃꢅꢆ (Under voltage trip selection)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.cDo-1m0 . All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
4.1.6  
Returning all parameters to standard default setting  
Setting the standard default setting parameter V[R to 3, all parameters can be returned to the  
those factory default settings.  
Note: For more details on the standard default setting parameter V[R, see 5.3.  
Notes on operation  
We recommend that before this operation you write down on paper the values of those  
parameters, because when setting V[R to 3, all parameters with changed values will be  
returned to standard factory default setting.  
Steps for returning all parameters to standard default setting  
Key operated  
LED display  
Operation  
4
Displays the operation frequency (perform during operation  
stopped).  
ꢂꢀꢂ  
MON  
CWJ  
V[R  
The first basic parameter "History (CWJ)" is displayed.  
Press the  
key or the  
key to change to V[R.  
Pressing the ENTER key displays the programmed  
parameters. (V[R will always display zero "" on the  
right, the previous setting on the left.)  
ENT  
ENT  
  ꢂ  
Press the  
key or the  
key to change the set value. To  
  ꢉ  
KPKV  
Pꢁꢂ  
return to standard factory default setting, change to "".  
Pressing the ENTER key displays "KPKV" while returning  
all parameters to factory default setting.  
Turn the power on.  
Select a parameter among Pꢁꢂ, Rꢃꢂ and Pꢃꢂ, using  
Pꢃꢂ  
the  
and  
keys. Select Pꢃꢂ in this case.  
Press the ENTER key to confirm your change.  
When KP KV is displayed, you can set the setup  
parameter.  
ENT  
KP KV  
ꢂꢀꢂ  
ꢂꢀꢂ  
The operation frequency is displayed (Standby).  
The operation frequency is displayed again.  
If there is something that you do not understand during this operation, press the MON key  
several times and start over again from the step of CWJ display.  
D-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
5. Basic parameters  
Basic parameters refer to parameters you have to set first before using the inverter.  
5.1  
Selecting an operation mode  
EOQF : Command mode selection  
HOQF : Frequency setting mode selection  
Function  
EOQF (command mode selection) :  
Used to select a mode of entering Run and Stop commands from the inverter (operation  
panel or terminal board).  
HOQF (frequency setting mode selection) :  
Used to select a mode of entering frequency setting commands from the inverter (internal  
potentiometer, operation panel, terminal board, serial communications with an external  
control device, or internal potentiometer/terminal board switching).  
5
<Command mode selection>  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
Default setting  
1
Command mode 0: Terminal block  
EOQF  
selection  
1: Operation panel  
[Settings]  
Terminal block  
:  
  A Run or Stop command is entered by inputting an ON or OFF signal from an  
operation  
external control device.  
Operation panel  
:  
  A Run or Stop command is entered by pressing the  
or  
key on  
RUN  
STOP  
operation  
the operation panel.  
(When an optional expansion operation panel is used)  
*
*
There are two kinds of functions: function of responding to signals from the device specified with  
the EOQF parameter, and function of responding to singles from the terminal board only.  
External input signal  
Function  
Input terminal function 12 (PNL/TB: OFF)  
Input terminal function 12 (PNL/TB: ON)  
Operation panel operation  
Terminal board operation  
EOQF=1  
When the highest-priority command is entered from an external control device or a terminal block,  
it takes priority over commands from the device specified with the EOQF parameter.  
<Frequency setting mode selection>  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
0 : Terminal block  
1 : Operation panel  
Frequency setting 2 : Internal potentiometer  
mode selection 3 : Serial communications (with an optional control  
Default setting  
2
HOQF  
device)  
4 : Terminal block/internal potentiometer switching  
[Settings]  
: Terminalblock A frequency setting command is entered by inputting a signal* from an  
external control device. (*: VI/S3 terminal: 0~(5)10Vdc or 4~20mAdc)  
Operation panel  
:  
The operation frequency is set by pressing the  
or  
key on the  
operation panel or an expansion operation panel (optional).  
Potentiometer  
: The operation frequency is set using the internal potentiometer built into the  
inverter. Turning the knob clockwise increases the frequency.  
Serial  
:  
The operation frequency is set by serial communications with an optional  
control device.  
communications  
Terminal block/  
:  
Switching between frequency setting by means of analog signals and that by  
internal  
potentiometer  
means of the internal potentiometer is done by activating or deactivating the  
input terminals (multi-function programmable input terminals).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comE.-1All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
The following control input terminals are always operative, no matter how the EOQF parameter  
(command mode selection) and the HOQF parameter (frequency setting mode selection) are  
set.  
 Reset terminal (enabled only when a trip occurs.)  
 Standby terminal  
 External input trip stop terminal  
Before changing the setting of the EOQF parameter (command mode selection) or the HOQF  
parameter (frequency setting mode selection), be sure to put the inverter out of operation. (When  
Hꢅꢀꢀ is set to , the settings of these parameters can be changed even during operation.)  
There are two kinds of functions: function of responding to signals from the device specified with  
the HOQF parameter and function of responding to signals from the terminal board only.  
When the highest-priority command is entered from an external device or a terminal board, it  
takes priority over commands from the device specified with the HOQF parameter.  
HOQF=0  
VI input  
5
HOQF=1  
PNL/TB:OFF  
UP and DOWN keys on  
operation panel  
PNL/TB:ON  
VI input  
EOQF: Terminal board  
Internal potentiometer  
VI input  
EOQF: Terminal board  
Serial communications  
VI input  
HOQF=2  
HOQF=3  
HOQF=4  
PNL/TB:OFF  
PNL/TB:ON  
PNL/TB:OFF  
PNL/TB:ON  
EOQF: Terminal board  
Internal potentiometer  
FCHG:OFF  
PNL/TB:OFF  
FCHG:ON  
VI input  
PNL/TB:OFF  
PNL/TB:ON  
VI input  
EOQF: Terminal board  
* To switch between current input and voltage input, use the Hꢁꢀꢆ parameter  
(Analog input / logic input function selection).  
5.2  
Meter setting and adjustment  
HOUN : FM/OUT terminal functions selection  
HO  
: Meter adjustment  
Function  
The FM/OUT terminal can be switched between meter output (PWM output) and open  
collector. When connecting a meter to the FM/OUT terminal, set the HOUN parameter to a  
number other than -1 (open collector output) and connect the meter between FM/OUT  
(positive side) and CC (negative side).  
If you want to connect a meter to the inverter, choose a full-scale 0~1mAdc ammeter or a  
full-scale 0~7.5Vdc-1mA voltmeter.  
The meter output of VFNC1 may have some errors because of PWM waveform.  
Especially if the meter output is near 0, the errors may be increased.  
E-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Adjustment scale with meter adjustment HO parameter  
Connect meters as shown below.  
<Frequency meter>  
<Ammeter>  
FM/OUT  
Meter: frequency  
meter  
(default setting)  
Meter: ammeter  
+
-
HOUN  
(
: 1)  
FM/OUT  
VF-nC1  
CC  
VF-nC1  
CC  
-
The reading of the frequency  
meter will fluctuate during  
scale adjustment.  
The reading of the frequency  
meter will fluctuate during  
scale adjustment.  
Optional frequency meter: QS-60T  
Make the maximum ammeter scale at least 150  
percent of the inverter's rated output current.  
[Connected meter selection parameters]  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
Default setting  
-1 : Open collector output  
0 : Output frequency  
1 : Output current  
2 : Set frequency  
5
HOUN  
Meter selection  
3 : For adjustment (current fixed at 100%)  
4 : For adjustment (current fixed at 50%)  
5 : For adjustment (output fixed at the max  
frequency)  
0
6 : For adjustment (gain display )  
Resolution  
  All FM terminals have a maximum of 1/256  
[Example of how to adjustment the FM terminal frequency meter]  
* Use the meter's adjustment screw to pre-adjust zero-point.  
Key operated  
LED display  
Operation  
Displays the operation frequency. (When standard monitor  
display selection Hꢅꢁꢀ is set to [operation frequency])  
ꢇꢀꢈꢀ  
MON  
CWJ  
HO  
The first basic parameter "CWJ" is displayed.  
Press either the key or the key to select "HO."  
Press the ENTER key to confirm your choice. A value  
corresponding to the setting of HOUN (FM/OUT terminal  
functions selection) is displayed.  
Press the key or the key to adjust the meter. The  
meter reading will change at this time but be careful  
because there will be no change in the inverter's digital LED  
(monitor) indication.  
ꢇꢀꢈꢀ  
ENT  
ꢇꢀꢈꢀ  
[Hint]  
It's easier to make the  
adjustment if you push and  
hold for several seconds.  
The adjustment is complete. HO and the frequency are  
displayed alternately.  
ENT  
ꢇꢀꢈꢀHO  
The display returns to its original indications (displaying the  
operation frequency). (When standard monitor display  
selection Hꢅꢁꢀ is set to [operation frequency].)  
ꢇꢀꢈꢀ  
MON  
MON  
Adjusting the meter in inverter stop state  
If, when adjusting the meter for output current, there are large fluctuations in data during  
adjustment, making adjustment difficult, the meter can be adjusted in inverter stop state.  
If HOUN is set to “for adjustment (current fixed at 100%)”, the inverter puts out signals via the  
FM / OUT terminal, assuming that 100% of current (inverter’s rated current) is flowing. In this  
state, adjust the meter with the HO (Meter adjustment) parameter. (HOUN: 4, 5, 6, 7 can be  
adjusted in the same way.)  
After meter adjustment is ended, set HOUN to (output current).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comE.-3All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
5.3  
Standard default setting  
V[R  
: Standard setting mode selection  
Function  
Allows setting of all parameters to the standard default setting, etc. at one time. (Except  
the setting of HO)  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
Default setting  
0
0 : -  
1 : Default setting 50Hz  
2 : Default setting 60Hz  
3 : Default setting  
Standard setting  
mode selection  
V[R  
4 : Trip clear  
5 : Cumulative operation time clear  
This function will be displayed as 0 during reading on the right. This previous setting is  
5
displayed on the left.  
Ex. 3  0  
V[R cannot be set during the inverter operating. Always stop the inverter first and then program.  
[Setting values]  
 50Hz standard setting (V[R=)  
To set the following parameters for a base frequency of 50Hz, set the V[R parameter to 1.  
(This setting does not affect the settings of any other parameters.)  
: 50Hz  
: 50Hz  
: 50Hz  
: 50Hz  
Maximum frequency HJ  
Base frequency 2 Hꢁꢅꢀ  
VI/S3 point 2 frequency Hꢂꢀꢄ  
Base frequency 1 XN  
Upper limit frequency WN  
Motor rated speed Hꢄꢁꢅ  
: 50Hz  
: 1410min-1  
 60Hz standard setting (V[R=)  
To set the following parameters for a base frequency of 60Hz, set the V[R parameter to 2.  
(This setting does not affect the settings of any other parameters.)  
: 60Hz  
: 60Hz  
: 60Hz  
: 60Hz  
Maximum frequency HJ  
Base frequency 2 Hꢁꢅꢀ  
VI/S3 point 2 frequency Hꢂꢀꢄ  
Base frequency 1 XN  
Upper limit frequency WN  
Motor rated speed Hꢄꢁꢅ  
: 60Hz  
: 1710min-1  
 Default setting (V[R=)  
Setting V[R to will return all parameters to the standard values that were programmed at the  
factory.  
When 3 is programmed, < KPKV will be displayed for a short time after setting and will then  
be erased and displayed the original indication “PꢉQ” (Setup parameter). (Only for VFNC1 (S)-  
□□□□P-W type) This setting clears all trip history data but it does not clear cumulative  
operation time data. This setting does not affect the settings of the following parameters.  
FM/OUT terminal functions selection HOUN  
Meter adjustment HO  
Analog input/logic input function selection Hꢁꢀꢆ Sink/source selection Hꢁꢂꢅ  
Free notes Hꢊꢊꢀ  
See 4.1.1 for setting of setup parameters.  
 Trip clear (V[R=)  
Setting V[R to initializes the past four sets of recorded error history data.  
* (The parameter does not change.)  
 Cumulative operation time clear (V[R=)  
Setting V[R to allows the initial resetting of the cumulative operation time monitor (0 [zero]  
time).  
* (The parameter does not change.)  
E-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
5.4  
Selecting forward and reverse runs (operation panel only)  
ꢋHT  : Forward/reverse selection (Operation panel)  
Function  
Program the direction of rotation when the running and stopping are made using the RUN  
key and STOP key on the operation panel. Valid when EOQF (command mode) is set to  
1 (operation panel).  
[Parameter setting]  
Title  
Function  
Forward/reverse selection 0: Forward run  
(Operation panel) 1: Reverse run  
Check the direction of rotation on the status monitor.  
Adjustment range  
Default setting  
0
HT  
5
HTꢌH  
:
Forward run   HTꢌT  
:
Reverse run ⇒ For monitoring,  
see 8.1.  
When the F and R terminals are used for switching between forward and reverse  
rotation from the terminal board, the HT forward/reverse run selection is rendered  
invalid.  
Short across the F-CC terminals: forward rotation  
Short across the R-CC terminals: reverse rotation  
This function is valid only when EOQF is set to  
K
(operation panel).  
5.5  
Setting acceleration/deceleration time  
CEE : Acceleration time 1 (s)  
FGE : Deceleration time 1 (s)  
Function  
1) For acceleration time CEE, program the time that it takes for the inverter output  
frequency to go from 0Hz to maximum frequency HJ.  
2) For deceleration time FGE, program the time that it takes for the inverter output  
frequency to go from maximum frequency HJ to 0Hz.  
Set acceleration time from 0Hz operation frequency to maximum frequency HJ and deceleration  
time as the time when operation frequency goes from maximum frequency HJ to 0Hz.  
Output frequency (Hz)  
HJ  
0
Time (s)  
CEE  
FGE  
[Parameter setting]  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
Default setting  
10.0  
CEE  
FGE  
Acceleration time 1 (s) 0.1-3000 seconds  
Deceleration time 1 (s) 0.1-3000 seconds  
10.0  
If the programmed value is shorter than the optimum acceleration/deceleration time determined  
by load conditions, overcurrent stall or overvoltage stall function may make the  
acceleration/deceleration time longer than the programmed time. If an even shorter  
acceleration/deceleration time is programmed, there may be an overcurrent trip or overvoltage  
trip for inverter protection. (For further details, see 13.1).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comE.-5All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
5.6  
Maximum frequency  
HJ  
: Maximum frequency (Hz)  
Function  
1) Programs the range of frequencies output by the inverter (maximum output values).  
2) This frequency is used as the reference for acceleration/deceleration time.  
Output frequency (Hz)  
When  
HJ  
= 80Hz  
This function determines the  
maximum value in line with the  
ratings of the motor and load.  
Maximum frequency cannot be  
adjusted during operation. To  
adjust, first stop the inverter.  
80Hz  
60Hz  
When HJ = 60Hz  
5
0              100%   Frequency setting signal (%)  
If HJ is increased, adjust the upper limit frequency WN as necessary.  
Parameter setting  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
Default setting  
*
HJ  
Maximum frequency (Hz) 30.0200 (Hz)  
*
The value is changed according to the set-up parameter condition.  
(VFNC1 (S)-□□□□P-W type)  
80 [Hz] for VFNC1 (S)-□□□□P-W type.  
5.7  
Upper limit and lower limit frequencies  
WN  
NN  
: Upper limit frequency (Hz)  
: Lower limit frequency (Hz)  
Function  
Programs the lower limit frequency that determines the lower limit of the output frequency  
and the upper limit frequency that determines the upper limit of that frequency.  
Upper limit  
frequency  
Lower limit  
frequency  
Output frequency (Hz)  
HJ  
Output frequency (Hz)  
HJ  
WN  
NN  
0           100%  
0           100%  
Frequency setting signal  
Frequency setting signal  
Signals with a frequency  
higher than the frequency set  
with WN will not be put out.  
The output frequency  
cannot be set below the  
frequency set with NN.  
Parameter setting  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
Default setting  
WN  
0.5HJ (Hz)  
0.0WN (Hz)  
*
0.0  
Upper limit frequency (Hz)  
Lower limit frequency (Hz)  
NN  
*
The value is changed according to the set-up parameter condition.  
(VFNC1 (S)-□□□□P-W type)  
80 [Hz] for VFNC1 (S)-□□□□P-W type.  
E-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
5.8  
Base frequency  
XNꢋ : Base frequency 1 (Hz)  
Function  
Sets the base frequency in conformance with load specifications or the motor's rated frequency.  
Note: This is an important parameter that determines the constant torque control area.  
Base frequency  
voltage  
ꢋHꢄꢀꢆ  
*
A voltage higher than the voltage  
set with Hꢄꢀꢆ is applied to the  
motor at a frequency higher than  
the base frequency set with XN,  
even if the Hꢄꢀꢆ parameter is  
set at a voltage lower than the  
input voltage.  
5
0
XN  
Output frequency (Hz)  
Parameter setting  
Title Function  
XN  
Adjustment range  
Default setting  
Base frequency 1 (Hz) 25200 (Hz)  
*
When operating the inverter with RVꢃ selected, change the setting of Hꢄꢁꢅ to the value printed on  
the rating plate, in addition to the setting of XN.  
*
The value is changed according to the set-up parameter condition.  
(VFNC1 (S)-□□□□P-W type)  
60 [Hz] for VFNC1 (S)-□□□□Ptype.  
5.9  
Selecting control mode  
RV : V/F control mode selection  
XD : Torque boost 1 (%)  
Hꢄꢀꢁ : Slip frequency gain  
Function  
With VF-nC1, the V/F controls shown below can be selected.  
x V/F constant  
x Vector control  
*
When torque is not produced enough at low speeds, adjust the rotational speed using  
the torque boost parameter. To correct the slip frequency, use the Hꢄꢀꢁ parameter  
(slip correction gain).  
Parameter setting  
Title  
Function  
V/F control mode  
selection  
Adjustment range  
0 (1,2): V/F constant  
3: Sensorless vector control  
Default setting  
0
RV  
Follow the steps below to set the RV parameter.  
(Example: Setting the V/F control mode selection parameter (RV) to 3 (Vector control))  
Key operated  
LED display  
Operation  
Displays the operation frequency (operation stopped).  
(When standard monitor display selection Hꢅꢁꢀ=is set  
to 0 [operation frequency]).  
ꢀꢈꢀ  
ENT  
CWJ  
RV  
The first basic parameter "History (CWJ)" is displayed.  
Switch to the control mode selection parameter (RV) by  
pressing the key.  
Press the ENTER key to display the parameter setting.  
(Default setting: 0 (V/F))  
ENT  
Change the setting to 3 (Vector control) by pressing the △  
key.  
Press the ENTER key to save the new setting. RV and the  
parameter setting “3” are displayed alternately.  
ENT  
RV  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comE.-7All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
1) Constant torque characteristic  
Setting of V/F control mode selection RV to (V/F constant)  
This setting is applied to loads, such as conveyers and cranes that require the same torque as the  
rated torque even at low speeds.  
Rated voltage of  
motor  
Hꢄꢀꢆꢋ  
XDꢋ  
0
Output frequency (Hz)  
Base frequency  XN  
To further increase the torque, increase the setting of the torque boost parameter (XD).  
Parameter setting  
5
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
0.030.0(%)  
Default setting  
XD  
Torque boost 1 (%)  
Depends on the model.  
The default torque characteristic is set based on the torque characteristic of World Energy series 4P  
motors manufactured by Toshiba Industrial Machinery.  
When using the inverter with a VF motor or a motor with 6 or more poles, set the torque boost  
parameter at 80% or so of the default setting.  
When the inverter is used with a special motor with a particular V/F ratio, it requires adjustments.  
Excessively boosting torque could results in an overcurrent trip. To avoid this, do not increase torque  
by more than 1.2 times the default torque.  
2) Correcting the error in rotational speed due to the slippage of the motor  
Setting of V/F control mode selection RV to (Vector control)  
Setting this parameter to 3 causes the inverter to monitor the load currents and automatically  
correct the error in speed caused by the slippage of the motor. Slip correction gain is adjusted to  
correct the error in speed caused by the slippage of the motor.  
⇒ See 6.12 for details.  
Rotational speed converted  
to frequency  
Torque  
Rated torque  
Synchronous  
Rotational  
rotational speed speed  
E-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
5.10  
Setting the electronic thermal  
QNO   : Electronic thermal protection characteristics  
 VJT  : Motor thermal protection level 1 (%)  
Function  
Selects the electronic thermal protection characteristics that fit with the ratings and  
characteristics of the motor.  
Parameter setting  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
Default setting  
Setting  
value  
Overload  
protection  
Overload  
stall  
×
×
×
×
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
×
×
×
×
Standard  
motor  
Electronic thermal  
protection  
characteristics  
5
QNO  
0
VF motor  
(special  
motor)  
Motor thermal  
protection level 1 (%)  
VJT  
30100 (%)  
100  
: valid, × : invalid  
1) Setting the electronic thermal protection characteristics selection  
QNO and  
motor electronic thermal protection level 1 VJT  
The electronic thermal protection characteristics selection QNO is used to enable or disable the  
motor overload trip function (QNꢂ) and the overload stall function.  
While the inverter overload trip (QNꢁ) will be in constant detect operation, the motor overload trip  
(QNꢂ) can be selected using the parameter QNO.  
Explanation of terms  
Overload stall : When the inverter detects an overload, this function automatically lowers the  
output frequency before the motor overload trip QNꢂ is activated. The soft  
stall function allows the drive to run with balanced load current frequency  
without a trip. This is an optimum function for equipment such as fans,  
pumps and blowers with variable torque characteristics that the load current  
decreases as the operating speed decreases.  
Note: Do not use the overload stall function with loads having constant torque characteristics  
(such as conveyor belts in which load current is fixed with no relation to speed).  
[Using standard motors (other than motors intended for use with inverters)]  
When a motor is used in the lower frequency range than the rated frequency, that will decrease the  
cooling effects for the motor. This speeds up the start of overload detection operations when a  
standard motor is used in order to prevent overheating.  
Setting of electronic thermal protection characteristics selection QNO  
Setting  
value  
Overload  
protection  
Overload  
stall  
×
×
×
×
: valid,  
×
: invalid  
Setting of motor electronic thermal protection level 1 VJT  
If the capacity of the motor is smaller than the capacity of the inverter, or the rated current of the  
motor is smaller than the rated current of the inverter, adjust the electronic thermal protection level 1  
VJT so that it fits the motor's rated current.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comE.-9All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Output current reduction factor [%]  
VJT×1.0  
VJT×0.55  
0
30Hz  
Output frequency (Hz)  
Note: The motor overload protection start level is fixed at 30Hz.  
[Using a VF motor (motor for use with inverter)]  
Setting selection QNO of electronic thermal protection characteristics  
Setting  
value  
Overload  
protection  
Overload stall  
5
×
×
×
×
: valid, × : invalid  
A VF motor (motor for use with an inverter) can be used in lower frequency ranges than the general-  
purpose motor, but if that frequency is extremely low, the effects of cooling on the motor will deteriorate.  
Setting the motor electronic thermal protection level 1 VJT  
If the capacity of the motor being used is smaller than the capacity of the inverter, or the rated  
current of the motor is smaller than the rated current of the inverter, adjust the electronic thermal  
protection level 1 VJT so that it fits the motor's rated current.  
* If the indications are in percentages (%), then 100% equals the inverter's rated output current (A).  
Output current  
reduction factor [%]/[A]  
VJT×1.0  
VJT×0.6  
0
6Hz  
Output frequency (Hz)  
Setting of motor overload  
protection start level  
2) Inverter over load characteristics  
Set to protect the inverter unit. Cannot be changed or turned off by parameter setting.  
If the inverter overload trip function (QNꢁ) is activated frequently, this can be improved by  
adjusting the stall operation level Hꢇꢀꢁ downward or increasing the acceleration time CEE or  
deceleration time FGE.  
Inverter overload  
Time [s]  
100%: inverter rated output current  
60  
0
Output current [%]  
110%  
150%  
* To protect the inverter, overload trip may activate in a short period of time when output current  
reaches 150% or higher.  
Inverter overload protection characteristics  
Download from Www.Somanuals.cEo-1m0 . All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Motor 150%-overload time limit : Hꢇꢀꢅ  
Using the Hꢇꢀꢅ parameter (motor 150%-overload withstanding time), you can set the time  
(between 10 and 800 seconds) elapsed before an overload trip occurs (QNꢂ) when the motor is  
operated under a load of 150%.  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
Default setting  
Hꢇꢀꢅ  
Motor 150%-overload time limit 10800 (sec)  
300  
5.11  
Preset speed operation (speeds in 15 steps)  
UTꢁ UTꢅ : Preset speed operation frequencies 1~7 (Hz)  
Hꢂꢊꢅ Hꢂꢆꢄ : Preset speed operation frequencies 8~15  
Function  
A maximum of 15 speed steps can be selected just by switching an external contact signal.  
Multi-speed frequencies can be programmed anywhere from the lower limit frequency NN  
to the upper limit frequency WN.  
5
[Setting method]  
1) Run/stop  
The starting and stopping control is done from the terminal board.  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
Default setting  
Setting  
0
Command mode  
selection  
0: Terminal board  
1: Operation panel  
1
EOQF  
Note: If speed commands (analog signal or digital input) are switched in line with preset speed  
operations, select the terminal board using the frequency setting mode selection HOQF.  
See 3) or 5.1  
2) Preset speed frequency setting  
Set the speed (frequency) of the number of steps necessary.  
Setting from speed 1 to speed 7  
Title  
Function  
Preset speed operation  
frequencies 1~7  
Adjustment range  
NNWN (Hz)  
Default setting  
0.0  
UTꢁUTꢅ  
Setting from speed 8 to speed 15  
Title  
Function  
Preset speed operation  
frequencies 8~15  
Adjustment range  
NNWN (Hz)  
Default setting  
0.0  
HꢂꢊꢅHꢂꢆꢄ  
Example of a frequency setting for forward 15-speed operation  
Examples of preset speed contact input signals: When the input terminals are placed in sink logic  
mode  
: ON : OFF (Speed commands other than preset speed commands are valid when all are OFF)  
Preset speed  
Terminal  
CC  
S1  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15  
S1-CC  
S2-CC  
VI/S3-CC  
R-CC  
S2  
VI/S3  
R
Terminal functions are as follows.  
Terminal S1....................  
Terminal S2....................  
Input terminal function selection 3 (S1) Hꢁꢁꢃ=6 (SS1)  
Input terminal function selection 4 (S2) Hꢁꢁꢄ=7 (SS2)  
Terminal VI and input terminal function Hꢁꢀꢆ=2 (Contact input)  
selection 5 (VI/S3) Hꢁꢁꢉ=8 (SS3)  
Input terminal function selection 2 (R) Hꢁꢁꢂ=9 (SS4)  
Terminal VI/S3................  
Terminal R......................  
E-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
SS3 (preset speed 3) and SS4 (preset speed 4) are not assigned to any terminals at the factory.  
Before use, therefore, assign SS3 and SS4 to reserved terminals, using the input terminal  
function selection parameter. In the above example, these functions are assigned to the R and  
VI/S3 terminals.  
[Example of a connection diagram] (When the input terminals are placed in sink logic mode)  
Forward  
F (Forward run)  
CC  
S1  
Preset speed 1  
Preset speed 2  
Preset speed 4  
Preset speed 3  
S2  
5
R
VI/S3  
*1  
P15  
*1 : When using the VI/S3 terminal as a contact input terminal, be sure to insert a resistor* between  
the P15 and VI/S3 terminals. (* Recommended resistance: 4.7k-1/4W)  
3) Using other speed commands with preset speed command  
Command mode  
selection  
EOQF  
: Terminal board  
1 : Operation panel  
Frequency  
setting mode  
selection  
: Terminal  
board  
(Analog signal)  
: Terminal  
1 : Operation  
panel  
1 : Operation  
panel  
2 : Potentiometer  
board  
(Analog signal)  
2 : Potentiometer  
HOQF  
Entered  
Preset speed command Valid Note)  
Operation  
Analog signal Operation  
Potentiometer  
Valid  
Preset  
speed  
command  
Valid  
panel  
Command  
Valid  
Not  
entered  
Analog signal  
Valid  
panel  
Command  
Valid  
Potentiometer  
Valid  
(The inverter doesn’t accept preset speed command.)  
Note)The preset speed command is always given priority when other speed commands are input at  
the same time.  
Below is an example of 3-step speed operation with standard default setting.  
Output frequency  
[Hz]  
UTꢁ  
UTꢃ  
UTꢂ  
Time  
[s]  
0
ON  
OFF  
F-CC  
ON  
OFF  
S1(SS1)-CC  
S2(SS2)-CC  
ON  
OFF  
Example of 3-step speed operation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.cEo-1m2 . All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
6. Extended parameters  
Extended parameters are used for sophisticated operation, fine adjustment and other special  
purposes. Change parameter settings as required. See Table of extended parameters in Section 11.  
6.1  
Output signal-related parameters  
6.1.1  
Low speed signal  
Hꢀꢁꢁ : Low speed signal output frequency (Hz)  
Hꢀꢂꢁ : Output terminal selection 1 (FM/OUT)  
HOUN : FM/OUT terminal functions selection  
Hꢀꢂꢃ : Output terminal selection 3 (FLA, FLB, FLC)  
Function  
6
If the output frequency exceeds the frequency set with Hꢀꢁꢁ, an ON signal will be put out.  
This signal can be used as an electromagnetic brake excitation/release signal.  
When using  
a
low speed signal for reversing the direction of rotation of the motor, set the  
Hꢀꢁꢁ parameter (low speed signal output frequency) above 1 kHz.  
The low speed signal output frequency function is assigned by default to the FM/OUT  
terminal.  
Before using the FM/OUT terminal, you need to make a selection between meter (PWM)  
output and open collector output.  
To use the FM/OUT terminal as an open collector output terminal, set HOUN to -1 (open  
collector output).  
Signals can be sent to the relay output terminals FLA, FLB and FLC by changing a  
parameter setting.  
[Parameter setting]  
Title  
Function  
Low speed signal output  
frequency (Hz)  
Adjustment range  
0.6HJ (Hz)  
Default setting  
0.6  
Hꢀꢁꢁ  
 ■Related parameters  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
Default setting  
-1: Open collector output  
0: Output frequency  
1: Output current  
2: Frequency setting  
3: Adjustment (current output  
fixed at 100%)  
FM/OUT terminal functions  
selection  
HOUN  
0
4: Adjustment (current output  
fixed at 50%)  
5: Adjustment (output fixed at  
the max frequency)  
6: Adjustment (gain display)  
Hꢀꢂꢁ Output terminal selection 1 (FM/OUT) 0~13 (See 6.2.6 for details.)  
4
Hꢀꢂꢃ Output terminal selection 3 (FL)  
0~13 (See 6.2.6 for details.)  
10  
Output terminal setting  
The Hꢀꢂꢁ parameter (output terminal selection 1 (FM/OUT)) is set by default for low speed  
signal (ON signal).  
To switch from ON signal to OFF signal, and vice versa, change the output terminal function  
setting.  
[Parameter setting]  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
Setting  
013  
(See Section 11.)  
Output terminal selection 1  
(FM/OUT)  
4 (ON signal) or  
5 (OFF signal)  
Hꢀꢂꢁ  
To output signals to the FLA, FLB and FLC terminals, set the Hꢀꢂꢃ parameter.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comF.-1All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Output frequency [Hz]  
Set frequency  
Hꢀꢁꢁ  
0
Time [sec]  
Low speed signal output: 4  
FM/OUT terminal (Hꢀꢂꢁ)  
FL terminal (Hꢀꢂꢃ)  
ON  
OFF  
Low speed reverse signal output: 5  
FM/OUT terminal (Hꢀꢂꢁ)  
FL terminal (Hꢀꢂꢃ)  
ON  
OFF  
* FM/OUT terminal function selection (HOUN) : 0 (Output frequency)  
[Connection diagram]  
If using the relay with the rated voltage DC12V of operating  
coil, the maximum allowable voltage should be higher than  
120% of rated voltage, and the maximum ampere value  
should not exceed 50mA.  
P15  
6
Ry  
OUT  
(Operating coil resistance 250 ~ 800 approx.).  
6.1.2  
Output of specified speed reach si+gnal (output of arbitrarily set frequency)  
Hꢀꢁꢀ : Speed-reach setting frequency (Hz)  
Hꢀꢂꢁ : Output terminal selection 1 (FM/OUT)  
HOUN : FM/OUT terminal functions selection  
Hꢀꢂꢃ : Output terminal selection 3 (FLA, FLB, FLC)  
Function  
If the output frequency exceeds the Hꢀꢁꢀ-set frequency ±2.5 Hz, an OFF signal will be put  
out.  
ڎ
The low speed signal output frequency function is assigned by default to the FM/OUT  
terminal.  
ڎ
Before using the FM/OUT terminal, you need to make a selection between meter (PWM)  
output and open collector output.  
To use the FM/OUT terminal as an open collector output terminal, set HOUN to -1 (open  
collector output).  
ڎ
Signals can be sent to the relay output terminals FLA, FLB and FLC by changing a  
parameter setting.  
Parameter for specifying a frequency  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
0.0HJ (Hz)  
Default setting  
0.0  
Speed-reach setting frequency  
(Hz)  
Hꢀꢁꢀ  
 ■Related parameters  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
Default setting  
-1: Open collector output  
0: Output frequency  
1: Output current  
2: Frequency setting  
3: Adjustment (current output  
fixed at 100%)  
FM/OUT terminal functions  
selection  
HOUN  
0
4: Adjustment (current output  
fixed at 50%)  
5: Adjustment (output fixed at  
the max frequency)  
6: Adjustment (gain display)  
Hꢀꢂꢁ Output terminal selection 1 (FM/OUT) 0~13 (See 6.2.6 for details.)  
4
Hꢀꢂꢃ Output terminal selection 3 (FL)  
0~13 (See 6.2.6 for details.)  
10  
F-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Output frequency [Hz]  
Hꢀꢁꢀ 2.5Hz  
Hꢀꢁꢀ  
Hꢀꢁꢀ 2.5Hz  
0
Time [sec]  
Specified frequency reach signal: 8  
FM/OUT terminal (Hꢀꢂꢁ)  
FL terminal (Hꢀꢂꢃ)  
ON  
OFF  
Specified frequency reach reverse signal: 9  
FM/OUT terminal (Hꢀꢂꢁ)  
FL terminal (Hꢀꢂꢃ)  
ON  
OFF  
* FM/OUT terminal function selection (HOUN) : 0 (Output frequency)  
Note: Activate Hꢀꢂꢁ to output signals to the FM/OUT terminal, or set Hꢀꢂꢃ to 8 or 9 to output  
signals to the FLA, FLC and FLB terminals.  
6.2  
Parameters related to terminal function selection  
6
6.2.1  
Changing the function of the VI/S3 terminal  
Hꢀꢁꢄ : Analog input/logic input function selection  
Function  
This parameter is used to switch the function of the VI/S3 terminal between analog signal input  
and contact signal input.  
Parameter setting  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
Default setting  
0
Analog input/logic  
input function  
selection  
0: Voltage signal, 1: Current signal,  
2: Contact input  
Hꢀꢁꢄ  
*
To use the VI/S3 terminal as a contact input terminal in sink connection, be sure to insert an  
adequate resistor* between P15 and VI/S3. (* Recommended resistance: 4.7 k-1/4W)  
6.2.2  
Keeping an input terminal function always active  
Hꢀꢀꢁ : Always active function selection (ST)  
Function  
This parameter allows you to select a function you want to keep always active (ON). (Only one  
function can be selected.)  
Parameter setting  
Title  
Function  
Always active function  
selection (ST)  
Adjustment range  
Default setting  
1 (ST)  
Hꢀꢀꢁ  
0~40, 49, 54~57 (See Section 11.)  
6.2.3  
Changing the function of an input terminal  
Hꢀꢀꢀ : Input terminal selection 1 (F)  
Hꢀꢀꢃ : Input terminal selection 2 (R)  
Hꢀꢀꢂ : Input terminal selection 3 (S1)  
Hꢀꢀꢅ : Input terminal selection 4 (S2)  
Hꢀꢁꢄ : Analog input/logic input function selection *1  
Hꢀꢀꢆ : Input terminal selection 5 (VI/S3)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comF.-3All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Function  
These parameters are used to specify a function for each individual input terminal. With these  
parameters allowing selection from among 45 functions for each input terminal, you can design  
a system with great flexibility. (For Hꢀꢀꢆ (input terminal selection 5), you can make a  
selection from among 13 functions.)  
*1 Using the Hꢀꢁꢄ parameter, you can select a function between analog input (frequency  
command input) and contact input for the VI/S3 terminal. The VI/S3 terminal is set by default  
as a voltage signal input terminal. When using the VI/S3 terminal as a contact input terminal,  
you need to set Hꢀꢁꢄ to 2 (contact input enabled), and then to specify a contact input  
function for it, using Hꢀꢀꢆ, because it is set by default as a voltage signal input terminal.  
Note: Do not set Hꢀꢁꢄ parameter if VI/S3 terminal is not used as contact input.  
Setting of contact input terminal function  
Terminal  
symbol  
Adjustment  
range  
Title  
Function  
Default setting  
F
R
S1  
S2  
Hꢀꢁꢄ Analog input/logic input function selection  
Hꢀꢀꢁ Always active function selection (ST)  
Hꢀꢀꢀ Input terminal selection 1 (F)  
Hꢀꢀꢃ Input terminal selection 2 (R)  
Hꢀꢀꢂ Input terminal selection 3 (S1)  
Hꢀꢀꢅ Input terminal selection 4 (S2)  
02  
0 (voltage input)  
1 (standby)  
2 (forward run)  
3 (reverse run)  
6 (preset speed 1)  
7 (preset speed 2)  
0~40, 49,  
54~57  
(See  
6
Section 11.)  
The parameter below is enabled only when Hꢀꢁꢄ is set to 2.  
VI/S3 Hꢀꢀꢆ Input terminal selection 5 (VI/S3)  
517  
8 (preset speed 3)  
Note 1: The Hꢀꢀꢁ parameter (always active function selection) allows you to select a function you  
want to keep always active.  
Note 2: The Hꢀꢀꢆ parameter (input terminal selection 5 (VI/S3)) is enabled only when Hꢀꢁꢄ is  
set to 2.  
It is necessary to insert an adequate resistor* between P15 and VI/S3.  
(*Recommended resistance : 4.7k-1/4W)  
Connection method  
1) A-contact input  
Inverter  
Input terminal  
In sink logic mode  
A-contact switch  
This function is activated when the input and CC  
(common) terminals are short-circuited. This function is  
used to specify forward/reverse run or preset speed  
operation.  
CC  
2) Connection with transistor output (Sink logic)  
Inverter  
Programmable controller  
Input terminal  
Operation can be controlled by connecting the input and  
CC (common) terminals to the output (non-contact switch)  
of programmable controller. This function is used to  
a
specify forward/reverse run or preset speed operation.  
Use a transistor that operates at 15Vdc-5mA.  
CC  
*
Interface between inverter and programmable controller  
When an open collector output type programmable controller is being used for operation control,  
turning off the programmable controller with the inverter left ON causes a wrong signal to flow  
into the inverter, as shown in the figure below, because of a difference in control power potential.  
To avoid this, be sure to interlock the inverter and the programmable controller so that the  
programmable controller cannot be turned off when the inverter is on.  
Programmable controller  
Inverter  
+15V  
External  
P24  
+24V power supply  
Internal  
Fuse blowout  
detection circuit  
+15V power supply  
COM  
Fuse  
F-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
3) Sink logic/source logic input  
Switching between sink logic and source logic (input terminal logic) is possible.  
6.2.4  
Jog run  
Function  
The VF-nC1 inverter is capable of jog operation if its input terminal selection function is so set.  
Jog run refers to jogging or inching  
a
motor. Input of  
a
jog run signal causes the VF-nC1  
inverter to produce a jog run signal (fixed at 5Hz) for 0.1 seconds (fixed), regardless of the  
specified acceleration time. Cutting off a jog run signal causes the motor to coast to a stop.  
The motor continues to run in jog mode as long as both the jog run signal and the operation signal  
are put out. To enable the jog run function, you need to assign the jog run function (4) to an  
unassigned input terminal.  
 For the VF-nC1 inverter, all settings for jog run are fixed, as shown below.  
Jogging frequency  
Jogging stop pattern  
Acceleration time  
5Hz  
Coast stop  
0.1 sec.  
<Examples of jog run> (When the jog run function is assigned to the S1 terminal: Hꢀꢀꢂ=4)  
 S1-CC (JOG) ON + F-CC ON: Forward jog run  
6
 S1-CC (JOG) ON + F-CC ON: Reverse jog run  
 Normal operation frequency signal input + F-CC ON: Forward run  
 Normal operation frequency signal input + R-CC ON: Reverse run  
Output frequency [Hz]  
Set frequency  
Forward  
Forward Forward  
Reverse  
0
F-CC  
R-CC  
S1 (JOG)-CC  
Normal operation  
frequency setting  
signal input  
The jog run terminals (S1-CC) are enabled when the operation frequency is below 5Hz. They  
do not function when the operation frequency is higher than the jog run frequency (5Hz).  
The motor continues to run in jog mode while the jog run terminals (S1-CC) are electrically  
connected.  
Jog run has priority, and it continues even if any other operation command is entered during  
operation.  
Note: During jog run, the VF-nC1 inverter may produce an Low-speed detection signal (LOW) signal  
but not Designated frequency reach signal (RCH) signal, and therefore PI control is not  
performed.  
6.2.5  
Switching between control logics  
Hꢀꢃꢇ : Sink/Source selection  
Function  
This parameter is used to switch between sink logic (negative common) and source logic  
(positive common).  
Parameter setting  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
Adjustable within a range of 0 to 200  
0: Sink  
Default setting  
0
Hꢀꢃꢇ  
Sink/Source selection  
100: Source  
Others: Invalid  
*
The value is changed according to the set-up parameter condition. (VFNC1 (S)-□□□□P-W type)  
0 (sink) for VFNC1 (S)-□□□□Ptype.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comF.-5All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
6.2.6  
Changing the function of an output terminal  
Hꢀꢂꢁ : Output terminal selection 1 (OUT/FM)  
Hꢀꢂꢃ : Output terminal selection 3 (FLA, FLB, FLC)  
Function  
These parameters are used to send various signals from the inverter to an external device.  
With these parameters allowing selection from among 14 functions for each output terminal,  
you can design a system with great flexibility.  
How to use  
FLA  
FLB  
FL  
FLC  
6
Function of FM/OUT: Use the Hꢀꢂꢁ parameter to set it.  
 
P15  
Function of FLA, FLB, FLC: Use the Hꢀꢂꢃ parameter to set it.  
FM/OUT  
Ry  
*1  
* : The function of the FM/OUT terminal can be switched between meter output (PWM) and open  
collector output. To use the FM/OUT terminal as an open collector output terminal, set HOUN  
to -1 (open collector output).  
*1 If using the relay with the rated voltage DC12V of operating coil, the maximum allowable voltage  
should be higher than 120% of rated voltage, and the maximum ampere value should not exceed  
50mA.  
(Operating coil resistance 250 ~ 800 approx.).  
Setting of output terminal functions  
Terminal  
symbol  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
Default setting  
Output terminal selection 1  
(FM/OUT)  
Output terminal selection 3  
(FL)  
4 (low speed  
detection signal)  
FM/OUT  
Hꢀꢂꢁ  
Hꢀꢂꢃ  
0~13  
(See Section 11.)  
FL  
10 (failure FL)  
Default setting  
See 2.3 for details.  
Related parameters  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
-1: Open collector output  
0: Output frequency  
1: Output current  
2: Frequency setting  
FM/OUT terminal  
functions selection  
HOUN  
3: Adjustment (current output fixed at 100%)  
4: Adjustment (current output fixed at 50%)  
5: Adjustment (output fixed at the max  
frequency)  
0
6: Adjustment (gain display)  
F-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
6.3  
Basic parameters 2  
6.3.1  
Switching motor characteristics via input terminals  
Hꢀꢇꢁ : Base frequency 2 (Hz)  
Hꢀꢇꢀ : Base frequency voltage 2 (V)  
Hꢀꢇꢃ : Torque boost 2 (%)  
Hꢀꢇꢂ : Motor thermal protection level 2 (%)  
Function  
These parameters are used to switch between two different types of motors connected  
to the inverter or to change the  
characteristic of the motor according to the use conditions or operation mode.  
Note: The RV parameter (V/F control mode selection) is effective only for motor 1.  
If motor 2 is selected, V/F control will be selected regardless of the setting of the  
RV parameter (V/F control mode selection).  
6
Parameter setting  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
25200(Hz)  
50500  
Default setting  
*1  
Hꢀꢇꢁ Base frequency 2 (Hz)  
Hꢀꢇꢀ Base frequency voltage 2 (V)  
*2  
Depends on the model.  
(See Section 11.)  
100  
Hꢀꢇꢃ Torque boost 2 (%)  
0.030.0(%)  
Hꢀꢇꢂ Motor thermal protection level 2 (%) 30100(%)  
*1. *2. The value is changed according to the set-up parameter condition.  
(VFNC1 (S)-□□□□P-W type)  
*1 60 [Hz] for VFNC1 (S)-□□□□Ptype.  
*2 200 [V] for VFNC1 (S)-□□□□Ptype.  
Setting of switching terminals  
The function of switching from motor 1 to motor 2 is not assigned by default to any terminal. So,  
assign this function to an unassigned terminal if necessary.  
Parameters to be switched vary depending on the function number selected with an input terminal  
selection parameter.  
Function number of input terminal  
Parameters to be used and switched  
40:MCHG  
OFF  
39:THR2  
OFF  
5:AD2  
OFF  
Parameter to be used  
RV, XN, Hꢅꢁꢄ, XD, VJT, CEE,  
FGE  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
Parameter to be switched CEEHꢆꢁꢁ, FGEHꢆꢁꢀ  
Parameter to be switched RVRV: , XNHꢀꢇꢁ,  
HꢅꢁꢄHꢀꢇꢀ, XDHꢀꢇꢃ,  
VJTHꢀꢇꢂ  
OFF  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
-
ON  
-
Parameter to be switched RVRV: , XNHꢀꢇꢁ、  
CEEHꢆꢁꢁ, FGEHꢆꢁꢀ,  
HꢅꢁꢄHꢀꢇꢀ, XDHꢀꢇꢃ,  
VJTHꢀꢇꢂ  
Parameter to be switched RVRV: , XNHꢀꢇꢁ、  
CEEHꢆꢁꢁ, FGEHꢆꢁꢀ  
HꢅꢁꢄHꢀꢇꢀ, XDHꢀꢇꢃ,  
VJTHꢀꢇꢂ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comF.-7All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
F (F: Forward run)  
Forward run command  
CC  
S1(MCHG)  
S2(THR2)  
R(AD2)  
Switching to motor 2  
Switching to thermal 2  
Switching to acceleration/deceleration 2  
6.4  
Analog signals for frequency setting  
6
6.4.1  
Setting frequency command characteristics  
Hꢀꢁꢄ : Analog input/logic input function selection  
Hꢃꢁꢀ : VI/S3 reference point 1 setting (%)  
Hꢃꢁꢃ : V1/S3 point 1 frequency (Hz)  
Hꢃꢁꢅ : V1/S3 point 2 frequency (Hz)  
Hꢃꢁꢂ : VI/S3 reference point 2 setting (%)  
Function  
By changing the setting of Hꢀꢁꢄ, the function of the VI/S3 terminal can be switched  
between 0~(5)10Vdc voltage input and 4~20mAdc current input.  
The Hꢃꢁꢀ to Hꢃꢁꢅ parameters are used to adjust the output frequency according to the  
analog signal (voltage: 0~(5)10Vdc, current: 4~20mAdc) from an external device.  
Parameter setting  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
Default setting  
0
0: Voltage signal input (0~10(5)Vdc)  
1: Current signal input (0(4)~20Adc)  
2: Contact input  
Analog input/logic input  
function selection  
Hꢀꢁꢄ  
VI/S3 reference point 1  
setting (%)  
VI/S3 point 1 frequency (Hz) 0.0200.0(Hz)  
VI/S3 reference point 2  
setting (%)  
Hꢃꢁꢀ  
Hꢃꢁꢃ  
Hꢃꢁꢂ  
Hꢃꢁꢅ  
0100(%)  
0
0.0  
100  
*
0100(%)  
VI/S3 point 2 frequency (Hz) 0.0200.0(Hz)  
Note 1: Do not specify the same value for input points 1 and 2. If you do so, the error message  
GTTꢀ” will be displayed.  
* The value is changed according to the set-up parameter condition.  
(VFNC1 (S)-□□□□P-W type)  
80 [Hz] for VFNC1 (S)-□□□□Ptype.  
F-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
1) Adjustment of 0~10Vdc voltage input  
VI terminal  
The output frequency  
with respect to the  
voltage input is adjusted  
according to the selected  
reference point.  
Hꢃꢁꢅ  
80 (Hz)  
Gradient and bias can be  
set easily.  
Hꢃꢁꢃ  
0 (Hz)  
Hꢃꢁꢀ  
0 (%)  
0
: 0 (voltage input)  
Hꢀꢁꢄ  
Hꢃꢁꢂ  
100 (%)  
10V Voltage signal  
2) Adjustment of 4~20mAdc current input  
6
The output frequency with  
respect to the current input  
is adjusted according to the  
selected reference point.  
Gradient and bias can be  
set easily.  
Set Hꢃꢁꢀ to to  
produce a current input  
between 0 and 20mA.  
VI/S3 terminal  
Hꢃꢁꢅ  
80 (Hz)  
Hꢃꢁꢃ  
0 (Hz)  
Hꢃꢁꢀ  
20 (%)  
4
Hꢃꢁꢂ  
100 (%)  
Hꢀꢁꢄ:1(current input)  
20mA Current signal  
3) Adjustment of 0~5Vdc voltage input and external potentiometer (P5-VI/S3-CC)  
The output frequency  
with respect to the  
voltage input is adjusted  
according to the selected  
reference point.  
VI/S3 terminal  
Hꢃꢁꢅ  
80 (Hz)  
Gradient and bias can  
be set easily.  
Hꢃꢁꢃ  
0 (Hz)  
Hꢀꢁꢄ: 0 (voltage input)  
Hꢃꢁꢀ  
 0 (%)  
0V  
Hꢃꢁꢂ  
47~50 (%)  
5V voltage signal  
*
 
*
When an external potentiometer is connected to the inverter via the P5V terminal, it is  
necessary to set the Hꢃꢁꢂ (= 47 ~ 50 approx.) a voltage drop might occur,  
depending on the resistance of the resistor connected. Therefore, if there is no need  
to increase the output frequency above the frequency set with Hꢃꢁꢅ, use Hꢃꢁꢂ  
for this adjustment.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comF.-9All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
6.5  
Operation frequency  
6.5.1  
Starting frequency  
Hꢃꢅꢁ : Starting frequency setting (Hz)  
Function  
The frequency set with the Hꢃꢅꢁ parameter is put out immediately after the completion of  
frequency setting.  
[Parameter setting]  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
Default setting  
0.5  
Hꢃꢅꢁ  
Starting frequency setting (Hz) 0.510.0(Hz)  
Output frequency [Hz]  
6
Starting frequency setting  
Hꢃꢅꢁ  
0
Time [sec]  
6.5.2  
Start/stop control by means of frequency setting signals  
Hꢃꢅꢀ : Operation starting frequency (Hz)  
Hꢃꢅꢃ : Operation starting frequency hysteresis (Hz)  
Function  
The start/stop of operation can be controlled, by simply using frequency setting signals.  
[Parameter setting]  
Title  
Hꢃꢅꢀ  
Function  
Operation starting frequency  
(Hz)  
Adjustment range  
Default setting  
0.0  
0.0HJ (Hz)  
Operation starting frequency  
hysteresis (Hz)  
Hꢃꢅꢃ  
0.0HJ (Hz)  
0.0  
Output frequency [Hz]  
HJꢈ  
The inverter starts to accelerate when the  
frequency setting signal reaches point B.  
Deceleration starts when the frequency  
setting signal falls below point A.  
Hꢃꢅꢀ Hꢃꢅꢃ  
Hꢃꢅꢀꢈ  
Hꢃꢅꢀ Hꢃꢅꢃ  
0
A
B
100%  Frequency command value  
Download from Www.Somanuals.cFo-1m0 . All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
6.6  
DC braking  
DC braking  
6.6.1  
Hꢃꢆꢁ : DC braking starting frequency (Hz)  
Hꢃꢆꢀ : DC braking current (%)  
Hꢃꢆꢃ : DC braking time (s)  
Function  
Large braking torque can be obtained by applying  
a
direct current to the motor. These  
parameters are used to set the direct current to be applied to the motor, the application time  
and the starting frequency.  
[Parameter setting]  
6
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
0.0:(OFF),  
0.1HJ(Hz)  
0100(%)  
0.0:(OFF)  
Default setting  
DC braking starting frequency  
(Hz)  
DC braking current (%)  
Hꢃꢆꢁ  
0.0  
50.0  
1.0  
Hꢃꢆꢀ  
Hꢃꢆꢃ  
DC braking time (s)  
0.120.0(sec)  
Output frequency [Hz]  
Set frequency  
DC braking stop  
DC braking starting  
frequency Hꢃꢆꢁ  
0
Time [sec]  
Output current [A]  
DC braking current Hꢃꢆꢀ  
0
DC braking time Hꢃꢆꢃ  
Operation signal [F-CC]  
ON  
OFF  
Note: During DC braking, the overload protection sensitivity of the motor increases. To prevent  
tripping, the DC braking current is adjusted automatically in some cases.  
F-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
6.7  
Jump frequency – Jumping resonant frequencies  
Hꢃꢇꢁ : Jump frequency (Hz)  
Hꢃꢇꢀ : Jump width (Hz)  
Function  
Resonance due to the natural frequency of the mechanical system operated can be avoided by  
jumping the resonant frequency during operation. During jumping, hysteresis characteristics  
with respect to the resonant frequency are given to the motor.  
Output frequency [Hz]  
Jump frequency (Hꢀꢁꢃ)  
Jump width (Hꢀꢁꢂ)  
6
0
Frequency setting signal  
Adjustment range  
[Parameter setting]  
Title  
Function  
Jump frequency (Hz)  
Jump width (Hz)  
Setting  
0.0  
0.0  
Hꢃꢇꢁ  
Hꢃꢇꢀ  
NNWN (Hz)  
0.030.0 (Hz)  
Do not set jump frequencies that overlap each other.  
During acceleration or deceleration, the jumping function is disabled for the operation frequency.  
6.8  
6.9  
Preset speed operation frequencies 8 to 15  
Hꢃꢉꢇ Hꢃꢄꢅ : Preset speed operation frequencies 8 to 15 (Hz)  
See Section 5.11 for details.  
PWM carrier frequency  
Hꢂꢁꢁ : PWM carrier frequency  
Function  
1) This parameter is used for changing the carrier frequency in order to change the tone of the  
magnetic noise produced by the motor. This parameter is also effective in preventing the  
motor from resonating with its load machine or fan cover.  
2) In addition, this parameter is used to reduce the electromagnetic noise produced by the  
inverter. To reduce the electromagnetic noise, decrease the carrier frequency.  
Note: This reduces the electromagnetic noise but increases the magnetic noise from the motor.  
3) If the PWM carrier frequency is set above 4kHz, it may fall automatically during acceleration  
or under certain circumstances where an overcurrent flows.  
[Parameter setting]  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
Setting  
5
0:2kHz  
1:2kHz(random control)  
2:4kHz  
Hꢂꢁꢁ  
PWM carrier frequency 3:4kHz(random control)  
4:8kHz (automatic reduction mode) *1  
5:12kHz(automatic reduction mode) *1  
6:16kHz(automatic reduction mode) *1  
*1 Cartain models require to reduce the rated load current according to carrier frequency setting  
as following table.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.cFo-1m2 . All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Reduction in rated load current  
When the PWM carrier frequency is set above 4kHz, the rated current needs to be decreased.  
VFNC1S- Ambient Carrier frequency  
VFNC1-  
temperature  
4kHz or less  
8kHz  
12kHz  
16kHz  
2001P  
2002P  
50°C or less  
50°C or less  
40°C or less  
40 to 50°C  
40°C or less  
40 to 50°C  
40°C or less  
40 to 50°C  
40°C or less  
40 to 50°C  
50°C or less  
50°C or less  
40°C or less  
40 to 50°C  
50°C or less  
40°C or less  
40 to 50°C  
40°C or less  
40 to 50°C  
40°C or less  
40 to 50°C  
40°C or less  
40 to 50°C  
40°C or less  
40 to 50°C  
0.7A  
1.4A  
2.4A  
2.4A  
4A  
0.7A  
1.4A  
2.4A  
2.4A  
4A  
3.6A  
7.5A  
7.5A  
9.5A  
8.5A  
0.7A  
1.4A  
2.4A  
2.4A  
4A  
1.2A  
1.1A  
2.3A  
2.1A  
3.6A  
3.2A  
7.5A  
6.8A  
10.1A  
9.1A  
0.7A  
1.4A  
2.4A  
2.4A  
3.6A  
3.2A  
7.5A  
7.1A  
8.5A  
7.5A  
0.7A  
1.4A  
2.4A  
2.4A  
4A  
1.2A  
1.1A  
2.3A  
2.1A  
3.2A  
2.9A  
7.5A  
6.8A  
9.1A  
8.2A  
0.7A  
1.4A  
2.4A  
2.2A  
3A  
2.8A  
7.1A  
6.3A  
7.5A  
6.5A  
0.7A  
1.4A  
2.4A  
2.2A  
4A  
1.2A  
1.1A  
2.3A  
2.1A  
2.8A  
2.5A  
7.1A  
6.4A  
8A  
2004P  
2007P  
2015P  
2022P  
4A  
7.5A  
7.5A  
10.0A  
10.0A  
0.7A  
1.4A  
2.4A  
2.4A  
4A  
1.2A  
1.1A  
2.3A  
2.1A  
4A  
1001P  
1002P  
1004P  
1007P  
2002PL  
6
2004PL  
2007PL  
2015PL  
2022PL  
3.6A  
7.5A  
6.8A  
10.7A  
9.6A  
7.2A  
Function  
Although the rated current at 4kHz is shown on the rating plate, the PWM carrier frequency is  
set to 12kHz by default.  
Note: In order to protect the inverter, PWM carrier frequency may fall automatically depending on  
the circumstances even if it is under the derating in accordance with above table.  
If using foot-mounted type noise reduction filter EMFAS2011Z or EMFA2006Z with VF-nC1, it  
is necessary to decrease 5% more of rated current in above table.  
6.10  
Trip-less intensification  
6.10.1  
Auto-restart (restart during coasting)  
Hꢂꢁꢀ : Auto-restart control selection  
Caution  
Stand clear of motors and mechanical equipment.  
If the motor stops because of a momentary power failure, the equipment will start suddenly  
when the power is restored, and could cause injury.  
To prevent accidents, attach labels warning that there is the risk of a sudden start in the event  
Mandatory  
of a power failure to all inverters, motors and machines.  
Function  
This parameter detects the rotational speed and direction of rotation of the motor during coasting in the  
event of a momentary power failure, and restarts the motor smoothly as soon as power is restored (motor  
speed search function). Also, this parameter makes it possible to switch from commercial power operation to  
inverter operation without stopping the motor.  
During restart operation, the message “TVT[” is displayed.  
F-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Default setting  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
0: Disabled  
1: At auto-restart after momentary stop  
2: When ST-CC is turned on or off  
3: At auto-restart after momentary stop or  
when ST-CC is turned on or off  
Auto-restart control  
selection  
Hꢂꢁꢀ  
0
*
When the motor restarts in retry mode, this function will be activated regardless of the  
parameter setting.  
1) Auto-restart after momentary power failure (auto-restart function)  
Input voltage  
Motor speed  
ON  
OFF  
F-CC  
6
Hꢂꢁꢀ set to () : This function is activated when the power is restored after the main circuits  
and control power supply has detected an undervoltage.  
2) Start of motor during coasting (Motor speed search function)  
Input voltage  
ON  
OFF  
F-CC  
ON  
OFF  
R (ST)-CC  
*
The ST (standby signal) function is not assigned to any terminal.  
If necessary, assign this function to an unassigned terminal,  
using the multi-function programmable terminal function.  
Hꢂꢁꢀ set to (): The auto-restart function is activated when R(ST)-CC is short-circuited  
after they have been opened.  
Notes  
A waiting time between 200 and 300 msec is preset to allow the residual voltage in the  
motor to come down to a specified level during restart. For this reason, the start-up takes  
more time than usual.  
Use this function when operating a system with one inverter connected with one motor.  
This function may not be performed properly in a system with one inverter connected  
with multiple motors.  
Application to a crane or hoist  
The crane or hoist might allow the load to move downward during the time elapsed before  
the motor starts after receiving an operation starting command. When applying the  
inverter to such a lifting gear, set the auto-restart control selection parameter to 0  
(disabled) and avoid using the retry function.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.cFo-1m4 . All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
6.10.2  
Regenerative power ride-through control/slowdown stop control  
Hꢂꢁꢃ : Regenerative power ride-through control  
Function  
Regenerative power ride-through control :  
Function of letting the motor continue to run using its regenerative energy in the event of  
a momentary power failure. (Enabled if Hꢂꢁꢃ is set to 1 (enabled))  
Slowdown stop control:  
Function of quickly stopping the motor in case a momentary power failure occurs during  
operation. Motor regenerative energy is used to forcibly bring the motor to a stop.  
(Enabled if Hꢂꢁꢃ is set to 2 (slowdown stop))  
If the motor is stopped forcibly, it remains at a standstill until the operation command is  
cancelled temporarily or the power is turned off.  
[Parameter setting]  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
0: Disabled,  
1: Enabled,  
2: Slowdown stop  
Default setting  
0
6
Regenerative power ride-  
through control  
Hꢂꢁꢃ  
Note: Even if this parameter is set to 1 (enabled), the motor may coast to a stop under some load  
conditions. In that case, use this function along with the auto-restart function.  
[When the power is interrupted]  
The time for which the operation of the motor is continued depends  
on the machine’s inertia or load conditions. Before using this  
Input voltage  
function, therefore, perform a test to determine the inertial and load  
conditions.  
Motor speed  
The use of the retry function along with this function allows the  
motor to be restarted automatically without being brought to a stop.  
Regenerative power ride-through control is performed for about  
10ms (if Hꢂꢁꢃ is set to 1).  
Approx.  
100ms  
[When momentary power failure occurs]  
Input voltage  
Motor speed  
Less than 100 ms  
6.10.3  
Retry function  
Hꢂꢁꢂ : Retry selection (Selecting the number of times)  
Caution  
Stand clear of motors and machines when the retry function is activated.  
When the retry function is enabled, the motor and machine in alarm-stop status will restart  
suddenly after the specified time, and could cause injury.  
To prevent accidents, attach words of warning saying that the retry function is enabled to the  
inverter, motor and machine.  
Mandatory  
Function  
This parameter resets the inverter automatically when the inverter gives an alarm. During the  
retry process, the motor search faction is activated automatically, if necessary for restarting the  
motor smoothly.  
[Parameter setting]  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
0: Disabled,  
1~10: 1~10 times  
Default setting  
0
Retry selection (number of  
times)  
Hꢂꢁꢂ  
F-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Here are typical causes of tripping and the corresponding retry processes.  
Cause of  
Retry process  
Canceling conditions  
tripping  
Momentary  
power failure  
Overcurrent  
Overvoltage  
Overload  
Up to 10 times of retry in succession  
1st retry: About 1 sec. after tripping  
2nd retry: About 2 sec. after tripping  
3rd retry: About 2 sec. after tripping  
The retry function will be cancelled  
at once if:  
Tripping occurs for any reason  
other than momentary power  
failure, overcurrent, overvoltage  
or overload.  
         
         
         
10th retry: About 10 sec. after tripping  
The motor does not restart within  
the specified number of times.  
The retry function is not activated if tripping is caused by one of the following:  
QEC  
QEN  
: Arm overcurrent at start-up  
: Overcurrent on the load side at start-up  
GTTꢃ  
GTTꢂ  
GTTꢅ  
GTTꢆ  
GTTꢇ  
GGRꢀ  
: Main body RAM fault  
: Main body ROM fault  
: CPU fault  
: Remote control error  
: Driver fault  
GRJQ : Output open-phase failure  
G  
WRꢀ  
GHꢃ  
: External tripping stop  
: Undervoltage stop  
: Ground fault trip  
: EEPROM fault  
GRJK : Input open-phase failure  
Protective operation detection relay signals (FLA, FLB and FLC terminals) are not sent during the  
retry process.  
6
A virtual cooling time is provided for overload tripping (QNꢀ, QNꢃ), so that the retry process is  
started after the virtual cooling time and retry time.  
In the case of overvoltage tripping (QRꢀ~QRꢂ), tripping may recur unless the DC voltage falls  
below a predetermined level.  
In the case of overheating tripping (QJ), tripping may recur unless the internal temperature of the  
inverter falls below a predetermined level, since the internal temperature is monitored.  
Even if trip retention selection parameter (Hꢊꢁꢃ) is set to 1, the retry function is enabled if the  
number of times of retry is set with Hꢂꢁꢂ.  
During the retry process, the message “TVT[” and the item specified with the status monitor  
selection parameter Hꢇꢀꢁ are displayed alternately.  
6.10.4  
Avoiding overvoltage tripping  
Hꢂꢁꢆ : Over voltage limit operation  
Function  
This parameter is used to keep the output frequency constant or increase the frequency to  
prevent overvoltage tripping due to an increase in DC voltage during deceleration or constant-  
speed operation. The deceleration time may be prolonged during overvoltage limit operation.  
Overvoltage limiting level  
Output  
frequency  
Overvoltage limiting level  
DC voltage  
[Parameter setting]  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
Default setting  
0
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled,  
2: Enabled (forced quick  
deceleration)  
Over voltage limit  
operation  
Hꢂꢁꢆ  
Download from Www.Somanuals.cFo-1m6 . All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
6.11  
Performing PI control  
Hꢂꢊꢁ : PI control  
Hꢂꢊꢃ : Proportional (P) gain  
Hꢂꢊꢂ : Integral (I) gain  
Function  
These parameters are used to perform various kinds of process control, such as keeping the air quantity, flow  
rate or pressure constant by inputting feedback signals (4~20mA, 0~10V) from a detector.  
[Parameter setting]  
Title  
Function  
PI control  
Proportional (P) gain  
Integral (I) gain  
Adjustment range  
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled  
0.01100.0  
Default setting  
Hꢂꢊꢁ  
Hꢂꢊꢃ  
Hꢂꢊꢂ  
0
0.30  
0.20  
0.01100.0  
1) External connection  
6
U/T1  
V/T2  
W/T3  
R/L1  
M
S/L2  
T/L3  
Pressure  
gauge  
Preset speed  
setting  
S1  
S2  
P
Potentiometer setting  
Panel input setting  
VI/S3  
CC  
Feedback signal: 4~20mA, 0~10V  
2) Types of PI control interfaces  
The following combinations of process quantity data (frequency setting) and feedback data can be  
entered for PI control.  
Process quantity input data (frequency setting)  
Feedback input data  
Setting mode  
Frequency setting mode External analog input  
HOQF  
Hꢂꢃꢄ: 0 (voltage input)  
 ①VI/S3 (DC: 0~10V)  
Hꢂꢃꢄ:1 (current input)  
 ②VI/S3 (DC: 4~20mA)  
Internal potentiometer setting  
Panel input setting  
or ꢃ  
Preset speed setting  
Note: When the PI control function is enabled (Hꢂꢊꢁ: 1), the VI/S3 terminal is used exclusively  
as a feedback signal input terminal.  
Note: Do not set Frequency setting mode (HOQF) parameter to 0 if VI/S3 terminal is not used  
as contact input.  
If all terminals for preset speed are off, a speed command other than the preset speed  
3) Setting the PI control parameter  
Set the extended parameter Hꢂꢊꢁ (PI control) to (enabled).  
(1) It is recommended to set the parameters CEE (acceleration time) and FGE (deceleration  
time) to as small values as possible.  
(2) If there is a need to limit the output frequency, set it with the parameters WN (upper limit  
frequency) and NN (lower limit frequency). When process quantities are set from the operation  
panel, their adjustment ranges are limited by the settings of WN (upper limit frequency) and NN  
(lower limit frequency).  
F-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
4) Adjusting the PI control gain level  
Adjust the PI control gain level according to the process quantity, the feedback signal and the object  
to be controlled.  
The following parameters are provided for gain adjustment.  
Parameter  
Hꢂꢊꢃ (P gain)  
Hꢂꢊꢂ (I gain)  
Adjustment range  
0.01100.0  
0.01100.0  
Default setting  
0.30  
0.20  
Hꢂꢊꢃ (Proportional (P) gain adjustment parameter)  
This parameter is used to adjust the proportional gain level during PI control. A correction factor,  
which is proportional to the particular deviation (the difference between the set frequency and the  
feedback value), is obtained by multiplying this deviation by the parameter setting.  
Increasing the P gain increases response. However, increasing it higher than required results in an  
undesirable event such as hunting.  
Fast response  
Process quantity  
setting  
6
Slow response  
Time  
Hꢂꢊꢂ (Integral (I) gain adjustment parameter)  
This parameter is used to adjust the integral gain level during PI control. Any deviations remaining  
after proportional control are cleared to zero (residual deviation offset function).  
Increasing the I gain increases response. However, increasing it higher than required results in an  
undesirable event such as hunting.  
Process quantity setting  
Residual deviation  
Time  
5) Adjusting an analog command voltage  
To use feedback input (VI/S3 terminal), perform a voltage-scaling adjustment as required. See  
Section 6.4.1 for details.  
If the feedback input value is very small, the voltage-scaling adjustment value can also be used for  
gain adjustment.  
Example of voltage signal setting  
Example of current signal setting  
Hꢀꢃꢅ  
(80Hz)  
Hꢀꢃꢅ  
(80Hz)  
Hꢀꢃꢀ  
Hꢀꢃꢀ  
(0Hz)  
(0Hz)  
4mA  
20mA  
Hꢀꢃꢆ  
100%  
0V  
Hꢀꢃꢂ  
0%  
10V  
Hꢀꢃꢆ  
100%  
Hꢀꢃꢂ  
20%  
Download from Www.Somanuals.cFo-1m8 . All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
6.12  
Improving torque and speed characteristics  
Setting motor constants  
6.12.1  
RV   : V/F control mode selection  
XN   : Base frequency 1 (Hz)  
Hꢅꢁꢀ : Slip frequency gain  
Hꢅꢁꢄ : Base frequency voltage 1 (V) (rated voltage of motor)  
When setting the RV parameter (V/F control mode selection) to 3 (slip correction), adjust  
the following parameters, too.  
Title  
XN  
Function  
Adjustment range  
25200 (Hz)  
0150 (%)  
Default setting  
Base frequency 1 (Hz)  
Slip frequency gain  
60  
50  
Hꢅꢁꢀ  
Base frequency voltage 1 (V)  
(rated voltage of motor)  
The value is changed according to the set-up parameter condition. (VFNC1 (S)-□□□□P-W type)  
Hꢅꢁꢄ  
50500 (V)  
*
6
*
200 [V] for VFNC1 (S)-□□□□Ptype.  
Hꢅꢁꢀ : Used to set a motor slippage correction factor. There is no need to change the factory  
default setting under normal conditions. However, if the motor speed fluctuates considerably  
with load fluctuations, increase the gain to reduce fluctuations of the motor speed.  
Hꢅꢁꢄ : Used to set the rated voltage of the motor. There is no need to change the factory default  
setting when using ordinary motors. However, when using a motor with a rated voltage and  
a base frequency other than 200V-50Hz, 200V-60Hz or 220v-60Hz, enter the rated voltage  
of the motor printed on its rating plate, in addition to its base frequency (XN).  
6.12.2  
Optimizing control characteristics  
Although there is no need to change the settings of the following parameters under normal  
conditions, control characteristics may be improved by adjusting the parameters according to the  
motor specifications and load characteristics.  
ꢈHꢅꢀꢆ : Motor rated current  
ꢈHꢅꢀꢊ : Motor no-load current  
ꢈHꢅꢀꢇ : Motor rated speed  
ꢈHꢅꢀꢉ : Speed control gain  
ꢈHꢅꢀꢄ : Speed control stable coefficient  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
0.1-50.0(A)  
Default setting  
Depends on the model  
(See Section 11.)  
Depends on the model  
(See Section 11.)  
*
Hꢅꢀꢆ  
Motor rated current  
Hꢅꢀꢊ  
Motor no-load current  
30-80(%)  
Hꢅꢀꢇ  
Hꢅꢀꢉ  
Hꢅꢀꢄ  
Motor rated speed  
Speed control gain  
Speed control stable coefficient 0100(%)  
100-12000(min-1  
)
0100(%)  
40  
20  
*
The value is changed according to the set-up parameter condition. (VFNC1 (S)-□□□□P-W type)  
1710 [min-1] for VFNC1 (S)-□□□□Ptype.  
Enabled if the RV parameter (V/F control mode selection) is set to 0 (V/F)  
Hꢅꢀꢉ : Used to adjust the effective response to the frequency command.  
Increase the value to increase response.  
Decrease the value to decrease response.  
Adjust the value in increments of 10 (%) or so while checking the effective response.  
Hꢅꢀꢄ : Used to adjust the effective response to the frequency command.  
Increase the value if overshooting or hunting occurs.  
Increase the value if the speed reducer makes a gear noise.  
Increase the value if overvoltage tripping occurs on completion of deceleration.  
Adjust the value in increments of 10 (%) or so while checking the effective response.  
F-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Enabled if the RV parameter (V/F control mode selection) is set to 3 (slip correction)  
Hꢅꢀꢆ : Used to set the rated current (A) of the motor. Enter the rated current printed on the  
motor’s rating plate.  
Hꢅꢀꢊ : Used to set the no-load current in percentage with respect to the rated current of the  
motor. Enter the value calculated from a motor test report value or the power factor  
printed on the rating plate of the motor.  
Hꢅꢀꢇ : Used to set the rated rotational speed (min-1) of the motor. Enter the rotating speed  
printed on the motor’s rating plate.  
Hꢅꢀꢉ : Used to adjust the response to the frequency command.  
Increase the value to increase response.  
Decrease the value to decrease response.  
Adjust the value in increments of 10 (%) or so while checking the effective response.  
Hꢅꢀꢄ : Used to adjust the effective response to the frequency command.  
Increase the value if overshooting or hunting occurs.  
Increase the value if the speed reducer makes a gear noise.  
Increase the value if overvoltage tripping occurs on completion of deceleration.  
Adjust the value in increments of 10 (%) or so while checking the effective response.  
6
6.13  
Acceleration/deceleration patterns and acceleration/deceleration 2  
CEE  
FGE  
: Acceleration time 1 (s)  
: Deceleration time 1 (s)  
Hꢆꢁꢁ : Acceleration time 2 (s)  
Hꢆꢁꢀ : Deceleration time 2 (s)  
Hꢆꢁꢆ : Acceleration/deceleration 1  
and 2 switching frequency  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
0.13000(s)  
0.13000(s)  
0.13000(s)  
0.13000(s)  
Default setting  
CEE  
Acceleration time 1 (s)  
Deceleration time 1 (s)  
Acceleration time 2 (s)  
Deceleration time 2 (s)  
Acceleration/deceleration  
1 and 2 switching  
10.0  
10.0  
10.0  
10.0  
FGE  
Hꢆꢁꢁ  
Hꢆꢁꢀ  
Hꢆꢁꢆ  
0WN(Hz)  
0
frequency  
Switching between acceleration and deceleration  
1) Changing the acceleration/deceleration time by adjusting the internal frequency (Hꢆꢁꢆ)  
– Changing the acceleration/deceleration time by adjusting the frequency set with Hꢆꢁꢆ –  
Output frequency [Hz]  
Set frequency  
Hꢆꢁꢆꢈ  
0
Time (sec)  
Accelerated at the  
gradient of time set with  
CEE  
Decelerated at the  
gradient of time set with  
Hꢆꢁꢀ  
Accelerated at the  
gradient of time set with  
Hꢆꢁꢁ  
Decelerated at the  
gradient of time set with  
FGE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.cFo-2m0 . All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
2) Changing the acceleration/deceleration time by adjusting the contact input signal  
– Changing the acceleration/deceleration time, using external terminals –  
Output frequency [Hz]  
0
Time (sec)  
ON  
OFF  
R(AD2)-CC  
Accelerated at the gradient of Decelerated at the gradient  
time set with CEE of time set with Hꢆꢁꢀ  
Accelerated at the gradient of Decelerated at the gradient  
time set with Hꢆꢁꢁ of time set with FGE  
6
This switching is done when acceleration/deceleration 2 (AD2) is assigned to the R terminal (when  
Hꢂꢂꢀ (input terminal selection 2) is set to 5 (acceleration/deceleration 2)), using the multi-  
function programmable input terminal function.  
In this case, set EOQF to 0 (terminal block).  
No signal for switching to acceleration/deceleration 2 is set by default. If necessary, assign  
function 5 (AD2) to an unassigned terminal, using the input terminal selection function.  
6.14  
Protection functions  
6.14.1  
Current stall setting  
Hꢊꢁꢀ : Stall prevention level  
Function  
If a current exceeding the level specified with Hꢊꢁꢀ, the stall prevention function is activated  
to decrease the output frequency.  
When specifying a value larger than 100 (%), set also the VMT parameter (motor electronic  
thermal protection level) properly.  
Parameter setting  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
Default setting  
150  
30199 (%)  
200: Invalid  
Hꢊꢁꢀ  
Stall prevention level  
[Message displayed along with an QE alarm]  
If an QE alarm goes off (if a current exceeding the stall prevention level), the output frequency  
displayed will change and the “E” on the left of it will blink.  
Example of display :  
Eꢊꢁ  
F-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
6.14.2  
Inverter trip retention  
Hꢊꢁꢃ : Inverter trip retention selection  
Function  
This parameter is used to prevent the tripped inverter from being restored to working order  
when the power is turned back on. The inverter can be restored by resetting it from the  
operation panel (terminal).  
[Parameter setting]  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
0: Not retained  
1: Retained  
Default setting  
0
Hꢊꢁꢃ  
Inverter trip retention selection  
Up to four sets of latest trip information displayed by the status monitor function can be stored  
in memory.  
When the power is turned back on, trip information (such as trip current and voltage) stored by  
the status monitor function will be cleared.  
6
Panel (terminal) reset  
Error information cleared  
Normal operation  
Inverter trips.  
Power turned back on:  
Error message  
displayed  
Inverter trips again:  
Error message  
displayed  
Power reset  
FL not activated  
FL activated  
If the cause of the error or other defective  
conditions is not eliminated  
6.14.3  
External input trip stop  
Hꢊꢁꢂ : External input trip stop mode selection  
Hꢃꢆꢃ : DC braking time (s)  
Function  
These parameters allow you to specify a method for stopping the inverter when it receives an  
external trip stop signal via input terminals or an emergency stop signal from the operation  
panel. When the inverter shuts down, the error message “G” is displayed on the inverter’s  
display panel and the error FL relay (trip output) is activated. When Hꢊꢁꢂ is set to  
(emergency DC braking), DC braking time also needs to be set using Hꢃꢆꢃ.  
1) External trip stop by means of a terminal  
External trip stop can be performed by means of the a-terminal. Perform the following steps to  
assign the external stop function to a terminal and to specify a stopping method.  
Input terminal  
a-terminal  
CC  
[Parameter setting]  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
0: Coast stop  
1: Slowdown stop  
2: Emergency braking stop  
0.0:OFF  
0.1HJ(Hz)  
0100(%)  
0.0:OFF  
Default setting  
0
External input trip stop mode  
selection  
Hꢊꢁꢂ  
DC braking starting frequency  
(Hz)  
DC braking current (%)  
Hꢃꢆꢁ  
Hꢃꢆꢀ  
Hꢃꢆꢃ  
0.0  
50  
DC braking time (s)  
1.0  
0.120.0(sec)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.cFo-2m2 . All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
(An example of terminal assignment) Assigning the trip stop function to the R terminal  
Title  
Hꢀꢀꢃ  
Notes:  
Function  
Adjustment range  
Default setting  
11  
Input terminal selection 2 (R)  
0~40, 49, 54~57  
(External trip stop)  
1) Emergency stop by means of the specified terminal is possible, even when operation is  
controlled from the operation panel.  
2) If Hꢃꢆꢁ (DC braking starting frequency) is set to 0.0 (Hz) and Hꢃꢆꢃ (DC braking  
time to 0.0 (sec), the DC braking function will not be activated even if Hꢊꢁꢂ is set to 2  
(emergency DC braking).  
2) Emergency stop by means of the operation panel  
The emergency stop function can be controlled from the operation panel when the RUN and STOP  
keys on the panel are not in use for operation (when they are inoperative).  
To activate the emergency stop function, press the STOP key on the operation panel twice.  
_________  
Press the STOP key  
GQHH” will blink.  
____  
ԙPress the STOP key again  
Operation will be stopped in accordance with the setting of  
Hꢊꢁꢂ. At the same time, “G” will be displayed and a  
failure detection signal (FL) will be put out (FL activated).  
6
6.14.4  
Output phase failure detection  
Hꢊꢁꢆ : Output phase failure detection mode selection  
Function  
This parameter allows you to select a mode of detecting an output open-phase failure. If an  
open-phase failure persists for one second or more, the tripping function and the FL relay will  
be activated, and at the same time, the error message GRJQ will be displayed.  
Set Hꢊꢁꢆ to “” to open the motor-inverter connection by switching commercial power  
operation to inverter operation.  
Detection errors may occur for special motors such as high-speed motors.  
Hꢊꢁꢆ(Disabled)・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ No tripping (FL relay not activated)  
Hꢊꢁꢆ(Enabled) ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ An open-phase check is performed when operation is  
started for the first time after power has been turned on.  
The inverter will trip if an open-phase failure persists for  
one second or more. (FL relay activated)  
Hꢊꢁꢆ(Enabled) ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・ An open-phase check is performed each time operation  
is started. The inverter will trip if an open-phase failure  
persists for one second or more. (FL relay activated)  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
0: Disabled  
1: Enabled (Checked at the first  
start of operation)  
2: Enabled (Checked at each start  
of operation)  
Default setting  
0
Output open-phase  
failure detection mode  
selection  
Hꢊꢁꢆ  
6.14.5  
Motor 150%-overload time limit  
Hꢊꢁꢇ : Motor 150%-overload time limit  
Function  
This parameter is used to set the time elapsed before the inverter trips when the motor is  
operated under a load of 150%.  
Title  
Hꢊꢁꢇ  
Function  
Motor 150%-overload time  
limit  
Adjustment range  
Default setting  
300  
10800 (sec)  
F-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
6.14.6  
Input phase failure detection  
Hꢊꢁꢉ : Input phase failure detection mode selection  
Function  
This parameter allows you to select a mode of detecting an input open-phase failure. If the  
ripple voltage in the main circuit capacitor remains very high for a certain period of time, the  
inverter will trip and the FL relay will be activated. At the same time, the error message  
GRJK will be displayed.  
If the power capacity is far larger than the inverter capacity (by more than 200kVA and more  
than 10 times), a detection error may occur. If this occurs, install an AC or DC reactor.  
If the motor capacity is very small as compared with the inverter capacity, no open-phase  
failures may be detected.  
Hꢊꢁꢉ(Disabled)・・・ No tripping (FL relay not activated)  
Hꢊꢁꢉ(Enabled) ・・・ An open-phase check is performed during operation. The inverter trips  
if the ripple voltage in the main circuit capacitor remains unusually  
high for a certain period of time. (FL relay activated)  
6
Title  
Hꢊꢁꢉ  
Function  
Adjustment range  
Default setting  
1
Input phase failure  
detection mode selection  
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled  
6.14.7  
Over-torque alarm  
Hꢊꢀꢊ : Over-torque alarm level  
Hꢊꢀꢉ : Over-torque detection time  
Hꢀꢂꢁ : Output terminal selection 1 (OUT/FM) (Hꢀꢂꢃ: Output terminal  
selection 3 (FL))  
Function  
An over-torque alarm signal is put out if a torque current exceeding the level set with Hꢊꢀꢊ  
(over-torque alarm level) flows for a period of time longer than that set with Hꢊꢀꢉ (over-  
torque detection time). To put out the signal via the FM/OUT or FL terminal, this function needs  
to be assigned to it in advance, using the output terminal function selection parameter.  
Title  
Function  
Over-torque alarm level  
Over-torque detection time  
Output terminal selection 1 (OUT/FM) 013  
Output terminal selection 3 (FL) 013  
Adjustment range  
0200(%)  
0.0010.0(sec)  
Default setting  
Hꢊꢀꢊ  
Hꢊꢀꢉ  
Hꢀꢂꢁ  
Hꢀꢂꢃ  
150  
0.5  
4
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.cFo-2m4 . All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
<Example of operation>  
1) If function 12 (OT: over-torque detection) is assigned to the FM/OUT terminal,  
using the output terminal selection parameter Hꢀꢂꢁ  
Hꢀꢂꢁ (FM/OUT terminal selection 1): 12 (OT: over-torque detection)  
Over-torque-  
detection signal  
P15-FM/OUT  
FF  
ON OFF  
Less than  
-set value  
Hꢊꢀꢉ  
Hꢊꢀꢉ  
Hꢊꢀꢊ  
-10%  
Hꢊꢀꢊ  
6
Torque current (%)  
Time (sec)  
* The VF-nC1 inverter has 10% of hysteresis to prevent the occurrence of over-torque hunting.  
Therefore, the over-torque signal is turned off at a level lower than the setting of  
10% (hysteresis).  
by  
Hꢊꢀꢊ  
6.14.8  
Undervoltage trip  
Hꢊꢃꢇ : Under voltage trip selection  
Function  
This parameter is used to select the control mode activated when an undervoltage is  
detected. The error message “WRꢀ” will be displayed if the inverter trips because of an  
undervoltage.  
Hꢊꢃꢇ: Disabled ・・・・The inverter shuts down but not trip. (FL relay not activated) The  
inverter shuts down if the voltage drops below 64% of the rated  
voltage.  
Hꢊꢃꢇ: Enabled ・・・・・The inverter shuts down. It trips if the voltage drops below 64% of  
the rated voltage. (FL relay activated)  
Hꢊꢃꢇ: Disabled ・・・・The inverter shuts down but not trip. (FL relay not activated) The  
inverter shuts down if the voltage drops below 50% of the rated  
voltage. When setting Hꢊꢃꢇ to , be sure to install the input  
reactor of an option.  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
0: Disabled  
Default setting  
1: Enabled (shutdown below 64%,  
FL relay activated)  
Under voltage trip  
selection  
0
Hꢊꢃꢇ  
2: Disabled (shutdown below 50%,  
FL relay not activated)  
F-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
6.14.9  
Analog input disconnection detection  
Hꢊꢂꢂ : Analog input disconnection detection  
Function  
This parameter is used to detect a break in an analog signal to the VI/S3 terminal. If an analog  
signal is below the level set with Hꢊꢂꢂ for 0.3 seconds (approx.), the inverter will assume the  
signal to be broken and it will trip and display the error message “Gꢋꢀꢉ.” (The Analog input  
disconnection detection function is disabled if Hꢊꢂꢂ is set to 0.0%.)  
Title  
Hꢊꢂꢂ  
Function  
Analog input  
disconnection detection  
Adjustment range  
0: Disabled  
1~100%  
Default setting  
0
6.15  
Operation panel parameters  
6
6.15.1  
Prohibiting the change of parameter settings  
Hꢇꢁꢁ : Prohibition of change of parameter settings  
Function  
This parameter specifies whether parameter setting is changeable or not.  
Setting methods  
[Parameter setting]  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
Default setting  
Prohibition of  
change parameter 0~7 (See the explanation below.)  
settings  
Hꢇꢁꢁ  
_____  
: Permitted  
: Prohibited  
: Permitted  
: Prohibited  
EOQF and HOQF settings cannot be changed during operation. (Default)  
All parameters are read/write-protected.  
EOQF and HOQF settings also can be changed during operation.  
Frequency can be changed from the operation panel but all other  
parameters are read/write-protected.  
_____  
_____  
_____  
_____  
_____  
_____  
_____  
: Permitted  
: Prohibited  
: Permitted  
: Prohibited  
The emergency stop function cannot be controlled from the operation panel  
and EOQF and HOQF settings cannot be changed during operation.  
The emergency stop function cannot be controlled from the operation panel  
but all parameters are read/write-protected.  
The emergency stop function cannot be controlled from the operation panel  
and EOQF and HOQF settings also can be changed during operation.  
The emergency stop function cannot be controlled from the operation panel,  
frequency can be changed on the operation panel, but any other parameters  
are write/read-protected.  
Note: Some parameters cannot be changed during operation, no matter how Hꢇꢁꢁ is set. (See  
4.1.4.)  
Canceling the setting  
Only the setting of Hꢇꢁꢁ can be changed anytime, no matter how it is set.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.cFo-2m6 . All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
6.15.2  
Changing the unit displayed (A/V/min-1  
)
Hꢇꢁꢀ : Unit selection  
Hꢇꢁꢃ : Frequency units selection  
Function  
These parameters are used to change the unit displayed on the display panel.  
% A (ampere)/V (volt)  
Frequency Motor speed or load speed  
Parameter setting  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
0: No change  
Default setting  
1: % A (ampere)/V (volt)  
Hꢇꢁꢀ  
Unit selection  
2: Free unit selection enabled (Hꢇꢁꢃ)  
3: % A (ampere)/V (volt)  
0
Free unit selection enabled (Hꢇꢁꢃ)  
Frequency units  
selection  
6
Hꢇꢁꢃ  
0.01200.0  
1.00  
Note: For the settings in the parameter list, no units can be converted from % into A (ampere)/ V (volt).  
Conversion from % into A (ampere)/V (volt) can be made in monitor mode only.  
An example of setting for changing the unit of volt/current displayed from % to A/V  
Set Hꢇꢁꢀ to or .  
When the VF-nC1-2007P inverter (current rating: 4.0A) is operated under the rated load (full-load).  
1) Displayed in percentage  
2) Displayed in amperes/volts  
Output current:  
100%  
Output current:  
4.0A  
Eꢀꢁꢁ  
E ꢅꢌꢁ  
DC voltage: 200V  
DC voltage:  
100%  
[ꢀꢁꢁ  
[ꢃꢁꢁ  
(converted into AC  
voltage)  
*
Conversion from % into A (ampere)/V (volt) can be made in status monitor mode only. For the  
settings in the parameter list, no units can be converted from % into A (ampere)/V (volt).  
An example of setting for displaying the motor or load speed  
Set Hꢇꢁꢀ to or .  
The value obtained by multiplying the operation frequency by the value set with Hꢇꢁꢃ will be  
displayed, as shown below.  
Value displayed  
=
Frequency displayed or parameter-set frequency × Value set with Hꢇꢁꢃ  
1) Displaying the rotational speed of the motor  
To switch from frequency (default: 60Hz) to speed (rotational speed of the 4P motor operated:  
1800 (min-1  
)
ꢊꢁꢁꢁ  
ꢀꢉꢁꢁ  
Hꢇꢁꢃ ꢀꢌꢁꢁ  
=
ꢈHꢇꢁꢃ ꢂꢁꢌꢁꢁꢈ  
×
=
60 30.00=1800  
2) Displaying the speed of the load  
To switch from frequency (default: 60Hz) to speed (speed of the conveyer operated: 6m/min-1  
)
ꢊꢁꢌꢁꢁ  
.ꢁ  
Hꢇꢁꢃ ꢀꢌꢁꢁ  
=
ꢈHꢇꢁꢃ ꢁꢌꢀꢁꢈ  
×
=
60 0.10=6.0  
Note: This parameter is designed to display the value obtained by multiplying the output frequency  
of the inverter by an integer. Even if the rotational speed of the motor fluctuates with load  
conditions, the output frequency will always be displayed.  
* Using Hꢇꢁꢀ, the following parameters can be converted.  
A display  
V display  
Free unit  
Display of the monitored current  
Display of the monitored voltage  
Display of the monitored frequency  
F-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
6.15.3  
Changing the standard monitoring item  
Hꢇꢀꢁ : Selection of monitor display selection  
Function  
This parameter is used to change the item displayed when the power is turned on.  
When the power is turned on, the operation frequency is displayed by default like this:  
ꢁꢌꢁ” or “QHH”. You can change this default monitoring item, using Hꢇꢀꢁ. In that  
case, however, no prefixes (such as V and E) will be displayed.  
Parameter settings  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
Default setting  
0
Selection of  
monitor display  
selection  
0: Operation frequency (Hz/free unit)  
1: Frequency command (Hz/free unit)  
2: Output current (%/A)  
Hꢇꢀꢁ  
6.16  
Communication function (common serial)  
6
Hꢉꢁꢁ : Communication baud rate  
Hꢉꢁꢀ : Parity  
Hꢉꢁꢃ : Inverter number  
Hꢉꢁꢂ : Communication error trip time  
For details, refer to the Communications Equipment User’s Manual.  
Function  
The VF-nC1 series of inverters can be connected to a host computer, controller, and so on  
(referred to as the computer) via RS232C or RS485 conversion units, so that they can be  
operated on a network.  
<Computer linking function>  
Data is exchanged between an inverter and a computer.  
Monitoring the inverter’s operation status (such as output frequency, current and voltage)  
Commands to the inverter (such as RUN and STOP commands)  
Reading, changing and writing inverter parameter settings  
<RS232C communications>  
Data is exchanged between one inverter and one computer.  
<RS485C communications>  
Data is exchanged between one computer and multiple inverters (a maximum of 64, or 63 for  
binary codes)  
The following unit and cables are optionally available for common serial communications.  
RS232C conversion unit (Model: RS2001Z)  
Communications cable (Model: CAB0011 (1m), CAB0013 (3m), CAB0015 (5m))  
Cable with a built-in RS232C conversion unit (Model: 20035)  
RS485C conversion unit with a terminal board (Model: RS4001Z, RS4002Z)  
Communications cable (Model: CAB0011 (1m), CAB0013 (3m), CAB0015 (5m))  
Note: Use a cable 5 m or less in length to connect an inverter and an optional common serial unit.  
    
Download from Www.Somanuals.cFo-2m8 . All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Communications parameters (Common serial options)  
The data transfer rate, parity type, inverter ID number and communication error trip time can be  
changed from the operation panel or the computer on the network.  
Title  
Hꢉꢁꢁ  
Function  
Adjustment range  
0: 1200bps  
Default setting  
3
Communication baud rate  
1: 2400bps  
2: 4800bps  
3: 9600bps  
4:19200bps  
Hꢉꢁꢀ  
Parity (Common serial)  
Inverter number  
Communication error trip  
time  
0: Non (non parity)  
1: Even (even parity)  
2: Odd (odd parity)  
099  
0: Disabled  
1100 (sec)  
1
Hꢉꢁꢃ  
Hꢉꢁꢂ  
0
0
*: Disabled・・・Means that the inverter will not trip even if a communication error occurs.  
Trip ・・・・・・・Means that the inverter will trip if a time-out occurs.  
6
If a time-out occurs, the error message “GTTꢆ” will blink on the display panel.  
6.16.1  
Using RS232C/RS485 conversion units  
Setting up the communications function  
Commands (RUN/STOP commands) entered across a network have priority (over commands  
from the operation panel or terminal boards).  
Data transmission specifications  
Item  
Specifications  
Half-duplex  
Data transmission  
scheme  
Connection scheme  
Synchronization  
scheme  
Centralized control  
Asynchronous  
Data transfer rate  
Default: 9600 baud (parameter setting)  
Selectable from among 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 and 19200 baud  
ASCII mode ... JIS X 0201, 8-bit (fixed, ASCII)  
Binary code ... Binary code, 8-bit (fixed)  
Receive (inverter): 1bit, Send (inverter): 2 bits  
Parity: Selectable among Even, Odd and Non by parameter setting,  
Check sum method  
Character  
transmission  
Stop bit length  
Error detection  
Character  
Receiving: 11-bit, Sending: 12-bit  
transmission format  
Order of bit  
Lower-order bits first  
transmission  
Frame length  
Variable to a maximum of 17 bytes  
Examples of connection for RS485 communications  
<Example of connection>  
Host computer  
Optional unit  
Optional unit  
・・・・  
nC1  
nC1  
nC1  
nC1  
nC1  
・・・・  
F-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
<Selective communications>  
When an operation frequency command is sent from the host computer to No. 3 inverter  
      : Cable route  
Host computer  
      : Data (host to INV)  
      : Answer-back data (INV to host)  
*
*
*
*
INV  
INV  
INV  
INV  
INV  
INV  
No.00  
No.01  
No.02  
No.03  
No.29  
No.30  
“Thrown away”: On receipt of data from the host computer, only inverters with  
specified ID numbers perform the specified operation, while all  
other inverters throw the data away and move to the ready state for  
receiving the next data.  
6
*: Use terminal boards to branch cables.  
The host computer sends data to all inverters on the network.  
On receiving the data from the computer, each inverter checks the inverter ID number  
contained in it.  
Only the inverter with the specified ID number (No. 3 in this case) decodes the command and  
performs the specified operation.  
No. 3 inverter sends the processing results to the host computer, along with its ID number.  
Thus, only No. 3 inverter operates in response to the operation frequency command from the  
host computer.  
6.16.2  
Free notes  
Hꢉꢉꢁ : Free notes  
Function  
This parameter allows you to specify an ID number for each inverter for management and  
maintenance purposes.  
Parameter setting  
Title  
Function  
Adjustment range  
Default setting  
0
Hꢉꢉꢁ  
Free notes  
065535  
Note: Adjustment range of the above mention can set by the computer on the network.  
The operation panel can set to the maximum 9999.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.cFo-3m0 . All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
7. Variety of operation  
7.1  
Setting the operation frequency  
Applied operation can be performed by selecting the inverter frequency setting, using the basic  
parameter HOQF (frequency setting mode selection).  
(1) Internal potentiometer setting  
(2) Operation panel key setting  
F
F
R
R
S1  
S2  
S1  
S2  
RUN  
RUN  
P5  
P5  
STOP  
STOP  
P15  
P15  
VI/S3  
CC  
VI/S3  
CC  
7
HOQFꢀꢁ  
HOQFꢀꢂ  
Enter the number with the operation panel keys, then  
press the ENTER key to confirm.  
(3) External potentiometer setting  
(4) Input voltage setting (0 to 10Vdc)  
F
F
R
R
S1  
S2  
S1  
S2  
RUN  
RUN  
P5  
P5  
STOP  
STOP  
P15  
P15  
VI/S3  
CC  
VI/S3  
CC  
Voltage signal  
HOQFꢀꢃ  
HOQFꢀꢃ  
Hꢂꢃꢄꢀꢃ (Input voltage signal)  
Hꢂꢃꢄꢀꢃ (Input voltage signal)  
Use the parameters Hꢁꢃꢂ to Hꢁꢃꢅ for this  
setting.  
Use the parameters Hꢁꢃꢂ to Hꢁꢃꢅ for this  
setting.  
To use P5, set Hꢁꢃꢆ at 50% or so.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comG.-1All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
(5) Input current setting (4 to 20mAdc)  
(6) Preset-speed setting  
F
F
R
R(SS4)  
S1  
S2  
S1  
S2  
RUN  
RUN  
P5  
P5  
STOP  
STOP  
P15  
P15  
VI/S3  
CC  
VI/S3  
CC  
Current  
signal  
HOQFꢀꢃ  
Frequency setting  
Hꢂꢃꢄꢀꢂ (Input current signal)  
Use the parameters Hꢁꢃꢂ to Hꢁꢃꢅ for  
this setting.  
UTꢂ to UTꢇ : 1 to 7-speed run  
Hꢁꢈꢇ to Hꢁꢄꢅ : 8 to 15-speed run  
(1) To select 3-speed run, use the terminals S1 and S2.  
(2) To select 7-speed run, use the terminals S1 to S3 (Add  
S3.).  
7
Set Hꢁꢃꢂ at 20% or so.  
 
 
Hꢂꢃꢄ : (Contact input)  
Hꢂꢂꢉ : (SS3)  
(3) To select 15-speed run, use the terminals S1 to S4 (Add  
S4.).  
 
 
 
Hꢂꢃꢄ : (Contact input)  
Hꢂꢂꢉ : (SS3)  
Hꢂꢂꢁ : (SS4)  
Note: When using VI/S3 as an input terminal, be sure to  
short-circuit P15 and VI/S3 with a resistor.  
(7) Setting by means of a remote input device  
(8) Setting for switching between voltage/current  
and internal potentiometer  
F
F
R
R
S1  
S1(FCHG)  
S2  
RUN  
RUN  
S2  
P5  
P5  
STOP  
STOP  
P15  
P15  
VI/S3  
CC  
VI/S3  
CC  
Voltage/current signal  
Optional connector  
HOQFꢀꢆ (Serial communications)  
HOQFꢀꢅ (Terminal block/internal potentiometer switching)  
Hꢂꢂꢆꢀꢆꢈ (Frequency command forced switching)  
G-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
7.2  
Setting the operation mode  
Applied operation can be performed by selecting the operation mode. To set the operation mode,  
use the basic parameter EOQF (command mode selection) and the input terminal selection  
parameter.  
(1) Operation panel operation  
(2) Terminal board operation  
F
R
F
R
S1  
S2  
S1  
S2  
RUN  
RUN  
P5  
P5  
STOP  
STOP  
P15  
P15  
VI/S3  
CC  
VI/S3  
CC  
7
EOQFꢀꢂ (Operation panel)  
EOQFꢀꢃ (Terminal block)  
(3) Operation panel/terminal board switching  
(4) Operation from an external input device  
F
F
R
R
S1(PNL/TB)  
S2  
S1  
S2  
RUN  
RUN  
P5  
P5  
STOP  
STOP  
P15  
P15  
VI/S3  
VI/S3  
CC  
CC  
Optional connector  
EOQFꢀꢂ (Operation panel)  
Priority is given to the external input device when  
the communications function is so set.  
Hꢂꢂꢆꢀꢂꢁ (Panel/terminal board switching)  
Switching from panel operation to terminal board  
operation is done by inputting a panel/terminal board  
switching signal.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comG.-3All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
8. Monitoring the operation status  
8.1  
Note 1  
Note 2  
Status monitor mode  
In this mode, you can monitor the operation status of the inverter.  
To display the operation status during normal operation:  
MON  
Press the  
key twice.  
Setting procedure (eg. operation at 60Hz)  
Item  
Key  
LED  
Communication  
Description  
displayed operated  
display  
No.  
The operation frequency is displayed (during operation).  
(When the standard monitor display selection parameter  
Hꢃꢄꢁ is set at 0 [operation frequency])  
ꢀꢁꢂꢁ  
Parameter  
setting  
mode  
MON  
MON  
CWJ  
HTꢅH  
Hꢀꢁꢂꢁ  
The first basic parameter "History (CWJ)" is displayed.  
Direction of  
rotation  
Operation  
frequency  
command  
Load  
The direction of rotation is displayed.  
FE01  
FE02  
(H : forward run, T : reverse run)  
8
The operation frequency command value is displayed.  
The inverter output current (load current) is displayed. (Default  
setting : unit %)  
Eꢆꢇꢁ  
[ꢄꢁꢁ  
Rꢄꢁꢁ  
Yꢆꢇꢁ  
Fꢆꢈꢁ  
Nꢆꢇꢁ  
Jꢆꢇꢁ  
Zꢀꢁꢂꢁ  
FE03  
FE04  
FE05  
FE20  
FE22  
FE27  
FE30  
FE00  
current  
Input  
The inverter input (DC) voltage is displayed.  
(Default setting: unit %)  
Note 3  
Note 3  
voltage  
Output  
The inverter output voltage is displayed. (Default setting:  
unit %)  
voltage  
Torque  
The torque current is displayed in %.  
current  
PI feedback  
The PI feedback value is displayed. (Unit: frequency)  
The inverter load factor is displayed in %.  
The inverter output power is displayed in %.  
The operation frequency is displayed.  
Inverter  
load factor  
Output  
power  
Operation  
frequency  
The ON/OFF status of each of the control signal input terminals  
(F, R, S1, S2 and VI/S3) is displayed in bits.  
ON: ꢄ  
C!ꢉ!  
Input terminal  
VI/S3  
Input  
Input terminal  
S1  
Cꢄ!!  
FE06  
OFF: _  
terminal  
Input terminal R  
Input terminal S2  
Input terminal F  
The ON/OFF status of each of the control signal output  
terminals (FM/OUT and FL) is displayed in bits.  
Output  
 
Qꢆꢆꢄꢄ  
FE07  
ON: ꢄ  
Qꢆꢄꢄ  
terminal  
OFF: _  
Output terminal  
FM/OUT  
Output terminal FL  
(Continued overleaf)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comH.-1All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
(Continued)  
Item  
Key  
LED  
Communication  
No.  
Description  
displayed operated  
display  
CPU1  
Xꢆꢄꢄ  
XYꢁꢄ  
FE08  
FE73  
FE09  
FE10  
FE11  
FE12  
FE13  
The version of the CPU1 is displayed.  
version  
CPU2  
The version of the CPU2 is displayed.  
version  
Memory  
XGꢁꢄ  
The version of the memory mounted is displayed.  
Past trip 1 (displayed alternately at 0.5-sec. intervals)  
Past trip 2 (displayed alternately at 0.5-sec. intervals)  
Past trip 3 (displayed alternately at 0.5-sec. intervals)  
Past trip 4 (displayed alternately at 0.5-sec. intervals)  
version  
Note 4  
Past trip 1  
Past trip 2  
Past trip 3  
Past trip 4  
QEꢊ ⇔ꢄ  
QJ  ⇔ꢋ  
QRꢊ ⇔ꢊ  
PGTT ꢌ  
Note 4  
Note 4  
Note 4  
Note 5  
Cumulative  
operation  
time  
The cumulative operation time is displayed.  
(0.01 corresponds to 1 hours.)  
VQꢂꢁꢄ  
ꢀꢁꢂꢁ  
FE14  
Default  
display  
mode  
MON  
The operation frequency is displayed (during operation).  
8
Note 1: Press the  
or  
key to change items displayed in the status monitor mode.  
Note 2: With the current unit selection parameter or voltage unit selection parameter, you can choose  
between percentage and ampere (A) for current or between percentage and volt (V) for  
voltage, respectively.  
2
Note 3: The input (DC) voltage displayed is 1/  
times as large as the rectified d.c. input voltage.  
Note 4: PGTT is displayed to show the absence of error.  
Note 5: The cumulative operation time increments only when the machine is in operation.  
H-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
8.2  
Display of trip information  
If the inverter trips, an error code is displayed to suggest the cause. In the status monitor mode, all  
trip records are retained.  
Display of trip information  
Error code  
Communication No. Description  
PGTT (*) 0000  
No error  
Overcurrent during acceleration  
Overcurrent during deceleration  
Overcurrent during operation  
Load-side overcurrent during start-up  
Armature-side overcurrent during start-up  
Input phase failure  
QEꢄ  
0001  
0002  
0003  
0004  
0005  
0008  
0009  
000A  
000B  
000C  
000D  
000E  
0010  
0011  
0012  
0013  
0014  
0015  
0016  
0017  
0018  
001A  
001E  
0022  
0025  
0026  
0027  
0032  
0033  
0034  
QEꢋ  
QEꢊ  
QEN  
QEC  
GRJꢄ  
GRJQ  
QRꢄ  
Output phase failure  
Overvoltage during acceleration  
Overvoltage during deceleration  
Overvoltage during constant-speed operation  
Inverter overload trip  
Motor overload trip  
Overheat trip  
Emergency stop  
E2PROM fault 1  
E2PROM fault 2  
E2PROM fault 3  
Inverter RAM fault  
Inverter ROM fault  
CPU fault trip  
Communication error  
Current detector fault  
Undervoltage trip  
Ground fault  
QRꢋ  
QRꢊ  
QNꢄ  
QNꢋ  
QJ  
8
G
GGRꢄ  
GGRꢋ  
GGRꢊ  
GTTꢋ  
GTTꢊ  
GTTꢌ  
GTTꢈ  
GTTꢃ  
WRꢄ  
GHꢋ  
Overcurrent flowing in element during acceleration  
Overcurrent flowing in element during deceleration  
Overcurrent flowing in element during low-speed operation  
Trip caused by a break in an analog signal cable  
CPU communication error  
Excessive torque boosted  
QEꢄR  
QEꢋR  
QEꢊR  
Gꢅꢄꢇ  
Gꢅꢄꢍ  
Gꢅꢋꢁ  
(Note) Past trip records (trip records retained or trips that occurred in the past) can be called up.  
(Refer to 8.1 "Status monitor mode" for the call-up procedure.)  
(*) Strictly speaking, this code is not an error code; this code is displayed to show the  
absence of error when the past trip monitor mode is selected.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comH.-3All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Example of call-up of trip information  
Item  
Key  
LED  
Communication  
Description  
displayed operated  
display  
No.  
Status monitor mode (The code blinks if a trip occurs.)  
The motor coasts and comes to a stop (coast stop).  
QRꢋ  
Note 1  
Parameter  
MON  
setting  
CWJ  
The first basic parameter "History (CWꢄ)" is displayed.  
mode  
Direction of  
MON  
The direction of rotation at the occurrence of a trip is displayed.  
HTꢅH  
Hꢀꢁꢂꢁ  
FE01  
FE02  
rotation  
(H : forward run, T : reverse run)  
Operation  
The operation frequency command value at the occurrence of a  
trip is displayed.  
frequency  
command  
Load  
The inverter output current at the occurrence of a trip is  
displayed. (Default setting: unit %)  
Eꢄꢊꢁ  
[ꢄꢌꢄ  
Rꢄꢁꢁ  
Yꢆꢇꢁ  
Fꢆꢈꢁ  
Nꢄꢁꢁ  
Jꢄꢁꢁ  
Zꢀꢁꢂꢁ  
FE03  
FE04  
FE05  
FE20  
FE22  
FE27  
FE30  
FE00  
current  
Input  
The inverter input (DC) voltage at the occurrence of a trip is  
displayed. (Default setting: unit %)  
voltage  
Output  
The inverter output voltage at the occurrence of a trip is  
displayed. (Default setting: unit %)  
voltage  
Torque  
The torque current at the occurrence of a trip is displayed in %.  
current  
The PI feedback value at the occurrence of a trip is displayed.  
8
PI feedback  
(Unit: frequency)  
Inverter  
load factor  
Output  
The inverter load factor at the occurrence of a trip is displayed  
in %.  
The output power of the inverter at the occurrence of a trip is  
displayed in %.  
power  
Operation  
frequency  
The operation frequency at the occurrence of a trip is displayed.  
The ON/OFF status of each of the control signal input terminals  
(F, R, S1, S2 and VI/S3) at the occurrence of a trip is displayed  
in bits.  
C!ꢉ!  
ON : ꢄ  
Input  
Input terminal  
S1  
Cꢄ!!  
FE06  
OFF : _  
terminal  
Input terminal VI/S3  
Input terminal R  
Input terminal S2  
Input terminal F  
The ON/OFF status of each of the control signal output  
terminals (FM/OUT and FL) at the occurrence of a trip is  
displayed in bits.  
Output  
Qꢆꢆꢄꢄ  
FE07  
Note 2  
 
terminal  
ON : ꢄ  
Qꢆꢄꢄ  
OFF : _  
Output terminal  
FM/OUT  
Output terminal FL  
(Continued overleaf)  
H-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
(Continued)  
Item  
Key  
LED  
Communication  
No.  
Description  
displayed operated  
display  
CPU1  
Xꢆꢄꢄ  
XYꢁꢄ  
FE08  
FE73  
FE09  
FE10  
FE11  
FE12  
FE13  
The version of the CPU1 is displayed.  
version  
CPU2  
The version of the CPU2 is displayed.  
version  
Memory  
XGꢁꢄ  
The version of the memory mounted is displayed.  
Past trip 1 (displayed alternately at 0.5-sec. intervals)  
Past trip 2 (displayed alternately at 0.5-sec. intervals)  
Past trip 3 (displayed alternately at 0.5-sec. intervals)  
Past trip 4 (displayed alternately at 0.5-sec. intervals)  
version  
Past trip 1  
Past trip 2  
Past trip 3  
Past trip 4  
QRꢋ ⇔ꢄ  
QJ  ⇔ꢋ  
QRꢊ ⇔ꢊ  
PGTT ꢌ  
Cumulative  
operation  
time  
VQꢂꢁꢄ  
QRꢋ  
FE14  
Cumulative operation time (0.01 corresponds to 1 hours.)  
Status monitor mode (The LED blanks if trip occurs.)  
Default  
display  
mode  
MON  
8
Note 1: Press the  
or  
key to change items displayed in the status monitor mode.  
Note 2: The FL output is held OFF in case of a trip, since the operation status immediately before the  
occurrence of the tip is retained by the status monitor output terminal board retention function.  
Note 3: Failure trip information is cleared if the power is turned off or the inverter is reset. Therefore,  
the operation status is displayed and all failure information except for the cause of the failure  
is cleared, even if the trip information retention function is activated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comH.-5All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
9. Taking measures to satisfy the CE / UL / CSA  
9.1  
Compliance with CE Marking  
9.1.1  
Abstract  
In Europe, EMC directive is enforced starting 1st Jan. of 1996, and Low Voltage Directive starting 1st  
Jan. of 1997. The display of CE mark that demonstrates that products imported to European Union  
conform to these directives is required. Inverter itself cannot function alone, but is de-signed as a  
component in order to control machines or equipment which includes that inverter installed in a  
cubicle. Therefore the conformance to EMC directive is not required on inverter it-self. But since the  
object of the Low Voltage directive is equipment that is designed to be used with rated voltage of 50  
to 1,000 VAC or 75 to 1,500 VDC, CE should be marked on inverter as to the Low Voltage directive.  
But CE has to be marked on the final product installing inverters, that conforms to the EMC directive  
and the Low Voltage directive. And the product also may conform to Machine directive. The user  
that makes the final products have to take the responsibility for Marking of CE. For that reason, we  
recommend installation for Low Voltage directive and measurement for EMC directive, so that the  
products including our inverter should conform to the EMC and Low Voltage directive.  
TOSHIBA carried out Approval testing and confirmation testing on representative models under the  
circumstances based on installation and measurement so that our products should conform to each  
directive. But we cannot confirm the conformance of the user’s products to the EMC directive. Since  
EMC environment changes according to the construction of the cubicle and the relation of other  
installed electric equipment and the condition of wiring and installation, please confirm the  
conformance to the EMC directive for the final products on your side.  
9
9.1.2  
EMC directive  
An inverter itself is not an object of CE marking.  
A machine which consists of an inverter and a motor is an object of CE marking.  
The EMC directive includes the emission section and the immunity section. VF-NC1 can conform to  
EMC directive by means of installing the recommended EMI noise filter to the input side, and wiring  
properly.  
Emission: Emission of electromagnetic wave and electromagnetic interference  
Immunity: Resistance to electromagnetic interference  
[EMC directive]  
89/336/EEC  
Table 1 Relative standard  
Standard  
Conducted Emission  
Radiated Emission  
Noise type  
Emission  
Test item  
Applicable standards  
EN55011 Group 1 class A  
EN55011 Group 1 class A  
IEC61000-4-2  
IEC61000-4-3  
IEC61000-4-4  
Electrostatic Discharge  
Radiated Electromagnetic field  
Electrical Fast Transient/Burst  
Surge Immunity  
EN61800-3  
Immunity  
IEC61000-4-5  
Conducted Disturbances  
Voltage dips, short interruptions  
and voltage variations  
IEC61000-4-6  
IEC61000-4-11  
I-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
9.1.3  
Compliance with EMC directive  
9.1.3.1 The model, noise filter inside  
(1) Single-phase 200V class : VFNC1S-2002PL to 2022PL  
The above mentioned models install EMI noise filter inside. So the conducted and radiated  
noise can be reduced, optional EMI noise filters are not needed.  
(The additional noise filter should be installed, when more effective reduction is required.)  
(2) The main cables such as input to the EMI filter and output of the inverter and the signal cables  
should be shielded, then cable length should be wired as short as possible. The main input  
cable should be separated from the main output cable, and cables for control signal also should  
be separated from main cables, not wiring parallel and not bundling, cross the wires where  
necessary.  
(3) Install EMI filter and inverter on the same metal back plate in an inverter panel. The metal back  
plate or the cubicle must be grounded absolutely, by using short thick wires, separated from the  
main cables.  
(4) Shielded cables should be grounded on the metal back plate in order to reduce the radiated  
noise from the other cables. It is an effective measure that shielded cables are grounded close  
to the inverter or/and operation panel or/and EMI filter(less than 10cm).  
(5) Installation of the zero-phase and/or the ferrite core can also effectively reduce the radiated  
noise further.(Input or/and output of inverter)  
Ex. Countermeasure - main circuit wiring】  
9
Connect to the  
power source  
Inverter  
panel  
(Metal)  
Shielded cables  
Grounding  
plate  
Separate input and  
output cables.  
Do not run input  
cables along-side  
output cables.  
Do not bundle input  
and output cables.  
Connect to  
the control  
IM  
Fig. 1  
I-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Shielded cable  
Strip the cable and fix it to the metal plate by means  
of a metal saddle for electrical work or equivalent.  
9.1.3.2 The models without EMI filters  
(1) Shingle-phase 100V class : VFNC1-1001P to 1007P  
Three-phase 200V class : VFNC1-2001P to 2022P  
Shingle-phase 200V class : VFNC1S-2002P to 2022P  
This subsection explains what measures must be taken to satisfy the EMC directive.  
Insert a recommended EMI filter (Table 2) on the input side of the inverter to reduce radiation  
and transmission noises. In the combinations listed in Table 2, inverters were checked for  
conformity with the EMC directive. For inverters used in Japan, it is recommended to use the  
NF series of noise filters.  
Table 2 lists noise filters recommended for the inverters.  
Table 2. Recommended EMI filter selection  
Filter for class A  
Filter for class B  
Voltage class  
Inverter  
Compliance Motor cable Compliance Motor cable  
length 20m or less  
length 5m or less  
VFNC1-2001P  
VFNC1-2002P  
VFNC1-2004P  
VFNC1-2007P  
VFNC1-2015P  
VFNC1-2022P  
VFNC1S-2002P  
VFNC1S-2004P  
VFNC1S-2007P  
VFNC1S-2015P  
VFNC1S-2022P  
VFNC1S-1001P  
VFNC1S-1002P  
VFNC1S-1004P  
VFNC1S-1007P  
VFNC1S-2002PL  
VFNC1S-2004PL  
VFNC1S-2007PL  
VFNC1S-2015PL  
VFNC1S-2022PL  
EMFA2006Z  
EMFA2006Z  
EMFA2006Z  
EMFA2006Z  
EMFA2015Z  
EMFA2015Z  
EMFAS2011Z  
EMFAS2011Z  
EMFAS2011Z  
EMFAS2025Z  
EMFAS2025Z  
EMFAS2011Z  
EMFAS2011Z  
EMFAS2011Z  
EMFAS2025Z  
With a built-in filter  
With a built-in filter  
With a built-in filter  
With a built-in filter  
With a built-in filter  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
9
Three-phase  
200V class  
Single-phase  
200V class  
Single-phase  
100V class  
With a built-in filter  
With a built-in filter  
With a built-in filter  
With a built-in filter  
With a built-in filter  
Single-phase  
200V class  
Built-in filter  
type)  
(2) The main cables such as input to the EMI filter and output of the inverter and the signal cables  
should be shielded, then cable length should be wired as short as possible. The main input  
cable should be separated from the main output cable, and cables for control signal also should  
be separated from main cables, not wiring parallel and not bundling, cross the wires where  
necessary.  
(3) Install EMI filter and inverter on the same metal back plate in an inverter panel. The metal back  
plate or the cubicle must be grounded absolutely, by using short thick wires, separated from the  
main cables.  
(4) Please separate input cable to EMI filter from output cable as much as possible.  
(5) Shielded cables should be grounded on the metal back plate in order to reduce the radiated  
noise from the other cables. It is an effective measure that shielded cables are grounded close  
to the inverter or/and operation panel or/and EMI filter(less than 10cm).  
I-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
(6) Installation of the zero-phase and/or the ferrite core can also effectively reduce the radiated  
noise further. (Input or/and output of inverter)  
Ex. Countermeasure - main circuit wiring】  
EMI filter  
Inverter panel  
(Metal)  
Shielded cables  
Grounding plate  
Separate input and  
output cables.  
Do not run input  
cables along-side  
output cables.  
Connect to  
the control  
Do not bundle input  
and output cables.  
9
Connect to the  
power source  
IM  
Fig. 2  
Note 1)  
Process as shown below.  
Strip the coating of the cable and fix the shielded part  
to the metal plate using a metal fitting.  
Shielded cable  
Fig. 3  
Operating with external signals】  
To operate with external signals, process as following figures.  
Ferrite core 1  
P5  
VI/S3  
circuit  
CC  
Control  
Potentiometer  
terminal  
Forward  
Reverse  
F
R
Shielded cable  
Fig. 4  
NOTE1)  
I-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Accessories for countermeasure】  
- Shielded cable  
- Shielded cable  
- EMI filter  
: Showa electric Wire & Cable Co. LTD.  
Type form/ CV-S, 600V or less  
: SUMITOMO 3M Co. Ltd. Electro-magnetic guard shielded sleeve  
Type form/ DS-5,7,10,14  
: Toshiba Schneider Inverter Corporation  
Type form/ For further details, see Table2  
- Ferrite core 1  
: TDK Co. Ltd.  
Type form/ ZCAT3035-1330  
Apply if needed】  
- Grounding plate  
: Toshiba Schneider Inverter Corporation  
Type form/ EMP001Z  
- Ferrite core  
: NEC TOKIN Corporation  
Type form/ ESD-R-47D-1  
- Zero-phase reactor  
- Radio noise filter  
: Soshin denki Co. Ltd.  
Type form/ RC5078 or RC9129  
: Soshin denki Co. Ltd.  
Type form/ NF series  
9
9.1.4  
Low voltage directive  
Inverter itself is an object of the CE marking.  
The Low Voltage Directive defines the safety of the electric equipment. VF-NC1 series conform to  
the Low Voltage directive based on EN50178.  
Normative standard  
Pollution degree  
: EN50178/Electronic equipment for use in power installation  
: 2(5.2.15.2)  
Over-voltage category : 3 200V class 3.0 mm (5.2.16.1)  
EN50178 provides that for electronic equipment used in power installations. The main intention is to  
stipulate minimum requirements for the design and manufacture of electronic equipment, for  
protection against electric shock, for testing and for the integration into systems for power  
installations.  
I-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
9.1.5  
Compliance with Low voltage directive  
Please carry out the below mentioned countermeasures for the Low Voltage Directive in case of  
using VF-NC1 as components of your products.  
(1) Inverter should be installed in a panel. Pay attention to wiring openings, so that it should  
prevent someone from touching live parts through the opening in case of maintenance.  
(2) No more than 1 cable should be connected to one earth terminal of the main terminal board. In  
this case, other cables for ground should be grounded on the metal back plate and/or in the  
cubicle. The cross-sectional area of grounding cable shall be, in any case, not less than;  
Table 3. Grounding cable  
Capacity of applicable  
motor(kW)  
Wire size  
Grounding cable  
Voltage class  
Inverter model  
0.1  
0.2  
0.4  
0.75  
0.2  
0.4  
0.75  
1.5  
2.2  
0.1  
0.2  
0.4  
0.75  
1.5  
2.2  
VFNC1S-1001P  
VFNC1S-1002P  
VFNC1S-1004P  
VFNC1S-1007P  
VFNC1S-2002P(L)  
VFNC1S-2004P(L)  
VFNC1S-2007P(L)  
VFNC1S-2015P(L)  
VFNC1S-2022P(L)  
VFNC1-2001P  
AWG 12 / 3.5 mm2  
AWG 12 / 3.5 mm2  
AWG 12 / 3.5 mm2  
AWG 12 / 3.5 mm2  
AWG 12 / 3.5 mm2  
AWG 12 / 3.5 mm2  
AWG 12 / 3.5 mm2  
AWG 12 / 3.5 mm2  
AWG 10 / 5.5 mm2  
AWG 12 / 3.5 mm2  
AWG 12 / 3.5 mm2  
AWG 12 / 3.5 mm2  
AWG 12 / 3.5 mm2  
AWG 12 / 3.5 mm2  
AWG 12 / 3.5 mm2  
Single-phase  
100V  
class  
Single-phase  
200V  
class  
VFNC1-2002P  
VFNC1-2004P  
VFNC1-2007P  
VFNC1-2015P  
Three-phase  
200V  
class  
9
VFNC1-2022P  
(3) MCCB or fuse should be connected to the input side of the EMI filter.  
9.2  
Compliance with UL Standard and CSA Standard  
The VF-NC1 models, that conform to the UL Standard and CSA Standard have the UL/CSA mark  
on the nameplate.  
9.2.1  
Compliance with Installation  
The VF-NC1 inverter must be installed in a panel, and used within the ambient temperature  
specification.  
They can be used at ambient temperature of up to 50 degrees by peeling off the label on the top of  
the inverter.  
9.2.2  
9.2.3  
Compliance with Connection  
Use the UL conformed cables (Rating 75or more) with the ring terminal at wiring to the inverter  
input/ output terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3).  
Compliance with Peripheral devices  
Use the UL listed fuses at connecting to power supply.  
Refer to the instruction manual about selecting the rating of them.  
Short circuit test is performed under the condition of the power supply short-circuit currents in  
below.  
These currents and fuse currents depend on the applicable motor capacities.  
I-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Table 4. AIC and fuse  
Inverter model  
AIC  
(Interrupting  
capacity)  
Capacity of  
applicable motor  
(kW)  
Fuse class and  
currentsA)  
Voltage class  
0.1  
0.2  
0.4  
0.75  
0.2  
0.4  
0.75  
1.5  
2.2  
0.1  
0.2  
0.4  
0.75  
1.5  
2.2  
VFNC1S-1001P  
VFNC1S-1002P  
VFNC1S-1004P  
VFNC1S-1007P  
VFNC1S-2002P(L)  
VFNC1S-2004P(L)  
VFNC1S-2007P(L)  
VFNC1S-2015P(L)  
VFNC1S-2022P(L)  
VFNC1-2001P  
AIC 1000A  
AIC 1000A  
AIC 1000A  
AIC 1000A  
AIC 1000A  
AIC 1000A  
AIC 1000A  
AIC 5000A  
AIC 5000A  
AIC 1000A  
AIC 1000A  
AIC 1000A  
AIC 1000A  
AIC 5000A  
AIC 5000A  
CC/J 6 max  
CC/J 8 max  
CC/J 12 max  
CC/J 22 max  
CC/J 4 max  
CC/J 8 max  
CC/J 12 max  
CC/J 22 max  
CC/J 30 max  
CC/J 3 max  
CC/J 3 max  
CC/J 5 max  
CC/J 8 max  
CC/J 15 max  
CC/J 20 max  
Single-phase  
100V class  
Single-phase  
200V class  
VFNC1-2002P  
VFNC1-2004P  
VFNC1-2007P  
VFNC1-2015P  
Three-phase  
200V class  
VFNC1-2022P  
9.2.4  
Motor thermal protection  
Selects the electronic thermal protection characteristics that fit with the ratings and characteristics  
of the motor. In case of multi motor operation with one inverter, thermal relay should be connected  
to each motor.  
9
I-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
10. Peripheral devices  
  Danger  
When using wiring materials and their optional devices for the inverter, they must  
be installed in a cabinet.  
Mandatory  
Failure to do so can lead to risk of electric shock and can result in death or serious  
injury.  
Connect earth cables securely. Failure to do so can lead to risk of electric shock  
or fire in case of a failure, short-circuit or leak current.  
Be Grounded  
10.1  
Selection of wiring materials and devices  
Capacity of  
applicable  
motor  
(kW)  
Wire size  
Voltage  
class  
Inverter model  
Main circuit  
(See Note 1.)  
DC reactor  
(optional)  
Grounding cable  
0.1  
0.2  
0.4  
0.75  
0.2  
0.4  
0.75  
1.5  
2.2  
0.1  
0.2  
0.4  
0.75  
1.5  
2.2  
VFNC1S-1001P  
VFNC1S-1002P  
VFNC1S-1004P  
VFNC1S-1007P  
VFNC1S-2002P(L)  
VFNC1S-2004P(L)  
VFNC1S-2007P(L)  
VFNC1S-2015P(L)  
VFNC1S-2022P(L)  
VFNC1-2001P  
AWG 14 / 2.0 mm2  
AWG 14 / 2.0 mm2  
AWG 14 / 2.0 mm2  
AWG 14 / 3.5 mm2  
AWG 14 / 2.0 mm2  
AWG 14 / 2.0 mm2  
AWG 14 / 2.0 mm2  
AWG 10 / 3.5 mm2  
AWG 10 / 5.5 mm2  
AWG 14 / 2.0 mm2  
AWG 14 / 2.0 mm2  
AWG 14 / 2.0 mm2  
AWG 14 / 2.0 mm2  
AWG 10 / 2.0 mm2  
AWG 10 / 2.0 mm2  
-
AWG 12 / 3.5 mm2  
AWG 12 / 3.5 mm2  
AWG 12 / 3.5 mm2  
AWG 12 / 3.5 mm2  
AWG 12 / 3.5 mm2  
AWG 12 / 3.5 mm2  
AWG 12 / 3.5 mm2  
AWG 12 / 3.5 mm2  
AWG 10 / 5.5 mm2  
AWG 12 / 3.5 mm2  
AWG 12 / 3.5 mm2  
AWG 12 / 3.5 mm2  
AWG 12 / 3.5 mm2  
AWG 12 / 3.5 mm2  
AWG 12 / 3.5 mm2  
Single-  
phase  
100V  
-
-
class  
-
AWG 16 / 1.25 mm2  
AWG 16 / 1.25 mm2  
AWG 14 / 2.0 mm2  
AWG 14 / 2.0 mm2  
AWG 14 / 2.0 mm2  
AWG 16 / 1.25 mm2  
AWG 16 / 1.25 mm2  
AWG 16 / 1.25 mm2  
AWG 14 / 2.0 mm2  
AWG 14 / 2.0 mm2  
AWG 14 / 2.0 mm2  
Single-  
phase  
200V  
class  
10  
VFNC1-2002P  
Three-  
phase  
200V  
VFNC1-2004P  
VFNC1-2007P  
class  
VFNC1-2015P  
VFNC1-2022P  
Note 1: Sizes of the wires connected to the input terminals R, S and T and the output terminals U, V and W  
when the length of each wire does not exceed 30m.  
Note 2: For the control circuit, use shielded wires 0.75 mm2 or more in diameter.  
Note 3: For grounding, use a cable with a size equal to or larger than the above.  
Note 4: When using a crimp terminal, cover its caulked part with a tube or use an insulated terminal.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comJ.-1All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Selection of wiring devices  
Non-fuse circuit breaker (MCCB)  
Earth leakage breaker (ELCB)  
Magnetic contactor  
(MC)  
Overload relay  
(THR)  
Capacity of  
Without reactor  
With DC reactor  
Without reactor  
With DC reactor  
Voltage applicable  
Adjusted  
Inverter model  
Type  
Rated  
Type  
class  
motor  
(kW)  
current  
(A)  
Type  
Rated  
Rated  
current  
(A)  
Rated  
current  
(A)  
MCCB  
/
MCCB  
/
Type  
Type  
Note1)  
current  
current  
(A)  
(ELCB)  
Note1)  
(ELCB)  
Note1)  
Note1)  
Note1)  
(A)  
(For reference)  
0.1  
0.2  
0.4  
0.75  
0.2  
0.4  
0.75  
1.5  
2.2  
0.1  
0.2  
0.4  
0.75  
1.5  
2.2  
VFNC1S-1001P  
VFNC1S-1002P  
VFNC1S-1004P  
VFNC1S-1007P  
VFNC1S-2002P(L)  
VFNC1S-2004P(L)  
VFNC1S-2007P(L)  
VFNC1S-2015P(L)  
VFNC1S-2022P(L)  
VFNC1-2001P  
5
---  
---  
---  
---  
5
---  
---  
---  
---  
9
9
---  
---  
---  
---  
9
---  
---  
---  
---  
0.7  
1.3  
2.3  
3.6  
1.3  
2.3  
3.6  
6.8  
9.3  
0.7  
1.3  
2.3  
3.6  
6.8  
9.3  
LR3D056  
LR3D066  
LR3D076  
LR3D086  
LR3D066  
LR3D076  
LR3D086  
LR3D126  
LR3D146  
LR3D056  
LR3D066  
LR3D076  
LR3D086  
LR3D126  
LR3D146  
Single-  
phase  
100V  
10  
15  
30  
5
NJ30E  
LC1D096  
LC1D186  
LC1D096  
(NJV30E)  
9
class  
18  
9
Single-  
phase  
200V  
10  
15  
20  
30  
5
5
9
9
LC1D096  
NJ30E  
NJ30E  
10  
15  
30  
5
9
9
(NJV30E)  
(NJV30E)  
18  
25  
9
LC1D186  
LC1D256  
12  
18  
9
LC1D126  
LC1D186  
class  
VFNC1-2002P  
5
5
9
9
Three-  
phase  
200V  
VFNC1-2004P  
5
NJ30E  
5
NJ30E  
9
LC1D096  
LC1D126  
9
LC1D096  
LC1D126  
(NJV30E)  
(NJV30E)  
VFNC1-2007P  
10  
15  
20  
5
9
9
class  
VFNC1-2015P  
10  
15  
9
9
VFNC1-2022P  
12  
12  
Note 1: Produced by Toshiba Schneider Electric Ltd.  
Note 2: Be sure to attach a surge killer to the exciting coil of the relay and the magnetic contactor.  
Selection of surge killers for Toshiba magnetic contactors  
200V class: Surge absorbing units are optionally available for Toshiba C11J to C20J  
Note 3: When using the auxiliary contacts 2a of the magnetic contactor MC for the control circuit, connect the  
contacts 2a in parallel to increase reliability.  
10  
Of the wiring devices listed in the above table, the magnetic contactors (MC) and the overload relays (Th-Ry)  
are intended for use with the Mighty J series. When using the old series (ESPER Mighty series), refer to the  
table below showing the correspondence between the two series.  
Magnetic contactor (MC)  
Overload relay  
ESPER Mighty series  
T11A  
ESPER Mighty series  
Mighty J series  
Mighty J series  
T13J  
C12A  
C20A  
C13J  
C20J  
J-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
10.2  
Installation of a magnetic contactor  
If using the inverter without installing a magnetic contactor (MC) in the primary circuit, use an MCCB  
(with a power cutoff device) to open the primary circuit when the inverter protective circuit is activated.  
Magnetic contactor in the primary circuit  
A magnetic contactor, if installed in the power supply circuit of the inverter, cuts off the power supply  
to the circuit and prevents the inverter from restarting, in the event of a power failure, a trip of the  
overload relay (thermal relay) or the activation of the inverter protective circuit.  
In addition, if the FL contact of the failure detection relay in the VF-nC1 is connected to the  
operation circuit of the magnetic contactor on the primary side, the magnetic contactor (MC) will be  
tripped when the inverter protective circuit is activated.  
VFnC1  
Thermal relay  
MCCB  
MC  
Motor  
IM  
R/L1  
S/L2  
T/L3  
U/T1  
V/T2  
W/T3  
Power  
supply  
MC  
FLB  
MC  
F
R
CC  
Forward run  
Reverse run  
Surge killer  
FLC  
FLA  
Example of connection of a magnetic contactor in the primary circuit  
10  
Notes on wiring  
When frequently switching between start and stop, do not use the magnetic contactor on the  
primary side as an on-off switch for the inverter. Instead, stop and start the inverter by using  
terminals F and CC (forward run) or R and CC (reverse run).  
Be sure to attach a surge killer to the exciting coil of the magnetic contactor (MC).  
Magnetic contactor in the secondary circuit  
A magnetic contactor may be installed on the secondary side to switch controlled motors or supply  
commercial power to the load when the inverter is out of operation.  
Notes on wiring  
Be sure to interlock the magnetic contactor on the secondary side with the power supply to  
prevent commercial power from being applied to the inverter output terminals.  
When installing a magnetic contactor (MC) between the inverter and the motor, avoid turning the  
magnetic contactor on or off during operation. Turning the magnetic contactor on or off during  
operation causes a current to rush into the inverter which could lead to malfunction.  
10.3  
Installation of an overload relay  
1) The VF-nC1 inverter has an electronic-thermal overload protective function. In the following  
cases, however, the activation level of the electronic thermal protection unit must be adjusted  
and an overload relay suitable for the motor installed between the inverter and the motor.  
When using a motor with a current rating different to that of the corresponding Toshiba  
general-purpose motor  
When operating a single motor with an output smaller than that of the applicable standard  
motor or more than one motor simultaneously  
2) When using the VF-nC1 inverter to operate a constant-torque motor, such as the Toshiba VF  
motor, adjust the protection characteristic of the electronic thermal protection unit to the VF  
motor use.  
3) It is recommended to use a motor with a thermal relay embedded in the motor coil to give  
sufficient protection to the motor, especially when it runs in a low-speed range.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comJ.-3All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
11. Table of parameters and data  
11.1  
User parameters  
Minimum setting  
unit Panel/  
Default User  
setting setting  
Title  
Function  
Unit  
Hz  
Adjustment range  
Reference  
3.1.2  
Communication  
HE  
Operation frequency of  
operation panel  
0.1/0.01  
0.0  
NNWN  
11.2  
Basic parameters  
Minimum setting  
unit Panel/  
Communication  
Default User  
setting setting  
Title  
Function  
Unit  
Adjustment range  
Reference  
4.1.3  
No.  
Communication  
CWJ  
-
History function  
-
-
Display latest 5  
changed parameters  
as a group.  
-
* Parameters can be  
edited within a  
group.  
CWH  
-
Wizard function  
-
-
0:-  
0
4.1.3  
1:Basic setting wizard  
2:Preset speed  
operation wizard  
3:Analog signal  
operation wizard  
4:Motor 1/2 switching  
operation wizard  
5:Torque up wizard *1  
0:Terminal block  
1:Operation panel  
0:Terminal block  
1:Operation panel  
2:Internal  
11  
EOQF 0003 Command mode  
selection  
HOQF 0004 Frequency setting  
mode selection  
-
-
-
-
1
2
5.1  
5.1  
potentiometer  
3:Serial  
communication  
4:Terminal  
block/internal  
potentiometer  
switching  
HOUN 0005 FM/OUT terminal  
-
-
-1: Open collector  
output  
0
5.2  
functions selection  
0:Output frequency  
1:Output current  
2:Set frequency  
3:For adjustment  
(current fixed at  
100%)  
4:For adjustment  
(current fixed at  
50%)  
5:For adjustment  
(output of max.  
frequency)  
6:For adjustment  
(display of gain)  
-
HO  
0006 Meter adjustment  
-
-
-
5.2  
*1: This parameter is valid only for VFNC1 (S)-□□□□P-W type.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comK.-1All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Minimum setting  
unit Panel/  
Communication  
No.  
Default User  
setting setting  
Title  
Function  
Unit  
-
Adjustment range  
Reference  
5.3  
Communication  
V[R  
0007 Standard setting mode  
selection  
-
0:-  
0
1:Set at 50Hz  
2:Set at 60Hz  
3:Default setting  
4:Trip clear  
5:Cumulative  
operation time clear  
0:Forward run  
1:Reverse run  
HT  
0008 Forward/reverse  
selection (Operation  
panel)  
-
-
0
5.4  
CEE  
FGE  
HJ  
WN  
NN  
0009 Acceleration time 1  
0010 Deceleration time 1  
0011 Maximum frequency  
0012 Upper limit frequency Hz  
0013 Lower limit frequency Hz  
0014 Base frequency 1  
0015 V/F control mode  
selection  
s
s
Hz  
0.1/0.1  
0.1/0.1  
0.1/0.01  
0.1/0.01  
0.1/0.01  
0.1/0.01  
-
0.1-3000  
0.1-3000  
30.0-200  
0.5- HJ  
0.0- WN  
25-200  
0 (1, 2): V/F  
3: Sensorless vector  
control  
10.0  
10.0  
*2  
*2  
0.0  
*2  
5.5  
5.5  
5.6  
5.7  
5.7  
5.8  
5.9  
XN  
RV  
Hz  
-
0
XD  
VJT  
0016 Torque boost 1  
0600 Motor thermal  
protection level 1  
%
%
0.1/0.1  
1/1  
0.0-30.0  
30-100  
*3  
100  
5.9  
5.10  
QNO  
0017 Electronic thermal  
protection  
-
-
0
5.10  
characteristic *4  
0
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
1
2
11  
3
4
5
6
7
NNꢁWN  
UTꢀ  
UTꢂ  
UTꢃ  
UTꢄ  
UTꢅ  
UTꢆ  
UTꢇ  
0018 Preset speed operation Hz  
frequencies 1  
0019 Preset speed operation Hz  
frequencies 2  
0020 Preset speed operation Hz  
frequencies 3  
0021 Preset speed operation Hz  
frequencies 4  
0022 Preset speed operation Hz  
frequencies 5  
0023 Preset speed operation Hz  
frequencies 6  
0024 Preset speed operation Hz  
frequencies 7  
0.1/0.01  
0.1/0.01  
0.1/0.01  
0.1/0.01  
0.1/0.01  
0.1/0.01  
0.1/0.01  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
5.11  
NNꢁWN  
NNꢁWN  
NNꢁWN  
NNꢁWN  
NNꢁWN  
NNꢁWN  
Hꢁꢁꢁ  
ITꢈW  
-
-
Extended parameter  
Search for changed  
settings  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
4.1.2  
4.1.3  
*2: The value is changed according to the set-up parameter condition.  
(VFNC1 (S)-□□□□P-W type)  
FH:80, UL80, VL:60, F127:0, F170:60, F171:200, F204:80, F409:200, F417:1710 for VFNC1 (S)-□□□  
Ptype.  
*3: Parameter values vary depending on the capacity. Refer to page K-8.  
*4:  
: Applicable,  
×
: Inapplicable  
K-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
11.3  
Extended parameters  
 Input/output parameters  
Minimum setting  
unit Panel/  
Communication  
Default User  
setting setting  
Title  
Function  
Unit  
Hz  
Adjustment range  
Reference  
6.1.1  
No.  
Communication  
Hꢀꢉꢉ 0100 Low speed signal  
output frequency  
Hꢀꢉꢀ 0101 Speed-reach setting Hz  
frequency  
Hꢀꢉꢊ 0109 Analog input/logic  
input function  
0.1/0.01  
0.1/0.01  
-
0.6-HJ  
0.6  
0.0  
0
0.0-HJ  
6.1.2  
-
0:Voltage signal input  
(0-5 or 10V)  
6.2.1  
selection (VI/S3)  
1:Current signal input  
(4-20mA)  
2:Contact input  
0~40, 49, 54~57  
Hꢀꢀꢉ 0110 Always active  
function selection  
Hꢀꢀꢀ 0111 Input terminal  
selection 1 (F)  
Hꢀꢀꢂ 0112 Input terminal  
selection 2 (R)  
Hꢀꢀꢃ 0113 Input terminal  
selection 3 (S1)  
Hꢀꢀꢄ 0114 Input terminal  
selection 4 (S2)  
Hꢀꢀꢅ 0115 Input terminal  
selection 5 (VI/S3)*5  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
(ST)  
2
(F)  
3
(R)  
6
(SS1)  
6.2.2  
6.2.3  
6.2.3  
6.2.3  
6.2.3  
6.2.3  
6.2.5  
6.2.6  
0~40, 49, 54~57  
0~40, 49, 54~57  
0~40, 49, 54~57  
0~40, 49, 54~57  
5-17  
7
(SS2)  
8
(SS3)  
Hꢀꢂꢇ 0127 Sink/Source selection  
0: Sink 100: Source  
1-99,101-200: Disabled  
0-13  
*2  
Hꢀꢃꢉ 0130 Output terminal  
selection 1  
4
(LOW)  
(FM/OUT)*6  
Hꢀꢃꢂ 0132 Output terminal  
selection 3 (FL)  
Hꢀꢇꢉ 0170 Base frequency 2  
Hꢀꢇꢀ 0171 Base frequency  
voltage 2  
11  
-
-
0-13  
10  
(FL)  
*2  
6.2.6  
Hz  
V
0.1/0.01  
1/1  
25-200  
50-500  
6.3.1  
6.3.1  
*2  
Hꢀꢇꢂ 0172 Torque boost 2  
Hꢀꢇꢃ 0173 Motor thermal  
protection level 2  
%
%
0.1/0.1  
1/1  
0.0-30.0  
30-100  
*3  
100  
6.3.1  
6.3.1  
*2: The value is changed according to the set-up parameter condition.  
(VFNC1 (S)-□□□□P-W type)  
FH:80, UL80, VL:60, F127:0, F170:60, F171:200, F204:80, F409:200, F417:1710 for VFNC1 (S)-□□□  
Ptype.  
*3: Parameter values vary depending on the capacity. Refer to page K-8.  
*5: This function is enabled if F109 is set at 2 (logic input).  
*6: This function is enabled if FMSL (open collector output) is set at 1.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comK.-3All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
 Frequency parameters  
Minimum setting  
unit Panel/  
Communication  
Default User  
setting setting  
Title  
Function  
Unit  
%
Adjustment range  
Reference  
6.4.1  
6.4.1  
6.4.1  
6.4.1  
6.5.1  
6.5.2  
6.5.2  
6.6.1  
No.  
Communication  
Hꢂꢉꢀ 0201 VI/S3 reference point 1  
setting  
1/1  
0-100  
0
Hꢂꢉꢂ 0202 VI/S3 point 1  
frequency  
Hꢂꢉꢃ 0203 VI/S3 reference point 2  
setting  
Hz  
%
0.1/0.01 0-200  
1/1 0-100  
0.0  
100  
*2  
Hꢂꢉꢄ 0204 VI/S3 point 2  
frequency  
Hꢂꢄꢉ 0240 Starting frequency  
setting  
Hꢂꢄꢀ 0241 Operation starting  
frequency  
Hꢂꢄꢂ 0242 Operation starting  
frequency hysteresis  
Hz  
Hz  
Hz  
Hz  
Hz  
0.1/0.01 0-200  
0.1/0.01 0.5-10.0  
0.1/0.01 0.0-HJ  
0.1/0.01 0.0-HJ  
0.1/0.01 0.0-HJ  
0.5  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
Hꢂꢅꢉ 0250 DC braking starting  
frequency  
Hꢂꢅꢀ 0251 DC braking current  
Hꢂꢅꢂ 0252 DC braking time  
Hꢂꢇꢉ 0270 Jump frequency  
Hꢂꢇꢀ 0271 Jumping width  
Hꢂꢋꢇ 0287 Preset speed operation Hz  
frequencies 8  
%
S
Hz  
Hz  
1/1  
0.1/0.1  
0.1/0.01 NN-WN  
0.1/0.01 0.0-30.0  
0.1/0.01 NN-WN  
0-100  
0.0-20.0  
50  
1.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
6.6.1  
6.6.1  
6.7  
6.7  
Hꢂꢋꢋ 0288 Preset speed operation Hz  
frequencies 9  
Hꢂꢋꢊ 0289 Preset speed operation Hz  
frequencies 10  
Hꢂꢊꢉ 0290 Preset speed operation Hz  
frequencies 11  
Hꢂꢊꢀ 0291 Preset speed operation Hz  
frequencies 12  
Hꢂꢊꢂ 0292 Preset speed operation Hz  
frequencies 13  
Hꢂꢊꢃ 0293 Preset speed operation Hz  
frequencies 14  
Hꢂꢊꢄ 0294 Preset speed operation Hz  
frequencies 15  
0.1/0.01 NN-WN  
0.1/0.01 NN-WN  
0.1/0.01 NN-WN  
0.1/0.01 NN-WN  
0.1/0.01 NN-WN  
0.1/0.01 NN-WN  
0.1/0.01 NN-WN  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
5.11  
11  
*2: The value is changed according to the set-up parameter condition.  
(VFNC1 (S)-□□□□P-W type)  
FH:80, UL80, VL:60, F127:0, F170:60, F171:200, F204:80, F409:200, F417:1710 for VFNC1 (S)-□□□  
PL-type.  
K-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
 Operation mode parameters  
Minimum setting unit  
Panel/  
Communication  
Default  
setting  
User  
Title  
Function  
Unit  
Adjustment range  
Reference  
No.  
setting  
Communication  
Hꢃꢉꢉ 0300 PWM carrier  
-
-
0:2kHz  
5
6.9  
frequency  
1:2kHz (Random  
mode)  
2:4kHz  
3:4kHz (Random  
mode)  
4:8kHzauto-reduction  
mode)  
5:12kHz (auto-  
reduction mode)  
6:16kHz (auto-  
reduction mode)  
0:Disabled  
Hꢃꢉꢀ 0301 Auto-restart control  
-
-
0
6.10.1  
selection  
1:At auto-restart after  
momentary stop  
2:When turning ST-  
CC on or off  
3:At auto-restart after  
momentary stop or  
when turning ST-CC  
on or off  
Hꢃꢉꢂ 0302 Regenerative power  
-
-
0:Disabled  
0
6.10.2  
ride-though control  
1:Enabled  
2:Deceleration stop  
Hꢃꢉꢃ 0303 Retry selection  
(Number of times)  
Hꢃꢉꢅ 0305 Over voltage limit  
operation  
Times  
-
1/1  
-
0(OFF),1-10  
0
0
6.10.3  
6.10.4  
0:Disabled  
1:Enabled  
2:Enabled (forced  
shortened  
deceleration)  
0: Disabled  
1: Enabled  
11  
Hꢃꢆꢉ 0360 PI control  
-
-
0
6.11  
Hꢃꢆꢂ 0362 Proportional (P) gain  
Hꢃꢆꢃ 0363 Integral (I) gain  
-
-
0.01/0.01 0.01-100.0  
0.01/0.01 0.01-100.0  
0.30  
0.20  
6.11  
6.11  
 Torque boost parameters  
Minimum setting  
unit Panel/  
Communication  
Communication  
Default User  
setting setting  
Title  
Function  
Unit  
Adjustment range  
Reference  
No.  
Hꢄꢉꢀ 0401 Slip frequency gain  
Hꢄꢉꢊ 0409 Base frequency  
voltage 1  
%
V
1/1  
1/0.1  
0-150  
50-500  
50  
*2  
6.12.1  
6.12.1  
Hꢄꢀꢅ 0415 Motor rated current  
Hꢄꢀꢆ 0416 Motor no-load current  
Hꢄꢀꢇ 0417 Motor rated speed  
Hꢄꢀꢋ 0418 Speed control gain  
Hꢄꢀꢊ 0419 Speed control stable  
coefficient  
A
%
0.1/0.1  
1/1  
1/1  
1/1  
1/1  
0.1-50.0  
30-80  
100-12000  
0-100  
*3  
*3  
*2  
40  
20  
6.12.2  
6.12.2  
6.12.2  
6.12.2  
6.12.2  
min-1  
%
%
0-100  
*2: The value is changed according to the set-up parameter condition.  
(VFNC1 (S)-□□□□P-W type)  
FH:80, UL80, VL:60, F127:0, F170:60, F171:200, F204:80, F409:200, F417:1710 for VFNC1 (S)-□□□  
Ptype.  
*3: Parameter values vary depending on the capacity. Refer to page K-8.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comK.-5All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Reference  
 Acceleration/deceleration time parameters  
Minimum setting  
unit Panel/  
Communication  
Communication  
Default User  
setting setting  
Title  
Function  
Unit  
Adjustment range  
No.  
Hꢅꢉꢉ 0500 Acceleration time 2  
Hꢅꢉꢀ 0501 Deceleration time 2  
Hꢅꢉꢅ 0505 Acceleration/decelerat Hz  
ion 1 and 2 switching  
s
s
0.1/0.1  
0.1/0.1  
0.1/0.01 0-WN  
0.1-3000  
0.1-3000  
10.0  
10.0  
0.0  
6.13  
6.13  
6.13  
frequency  
 Protection parameters  
Minimum setting  
unit Panel/  
Communication  
Communication  
Default User  
setting setting  
Title  
Function  
Unit  
%
-
Adjustment range  
Reference  
6.14.1  
6.14.2  
6.14.3  
No.  
Hꢆꢉꢀ 0601 Stall prevention level  
1/1  
30-199 (%)  
150  
0
200 (disabled)  
0: Not retained,  
1: Retained  
Hꢆꢉꢂ 0602 Inverter trip retention  
selection  
Hꢆꢉꢃ 0603 External input trip stop  
mode selection  
-
-
-
0:Coast stop  
0
1:Slowdown stop  
2:Emergency DC  
braking  
Hꢆꢉꢅ 0605 Output phase failure  
detection mode  
-
-
0:Disabled  
1:Selected (Output  
open-phase is  
0
6.14.4  
selection  
checked when  
operation is started  
for the first time after  
power is turned on.)  
2:Selected (Output  
open-phase is  
checked each time  
operation is started.)  
10800  
11  
Hꢆꢉꢇ 0607 Motor 150%-overload  
s
-
1/1  
-
300  
1
6.14.5  
6.14.6  
time limit  
Hꢆꢉꢋ 0608 Input phase failure  
detection mode  
0: Disabled,  
1: Enabled  
selection  
Hꢆꢀꢆ 0616 Over-torque alarm  
level  
Hꢆꢀꢋ 0618 Over-torque detection  
time  
Hꢆꢂꢇ 0627 Under voltage trip  
selection  
%
s
1
0.1  
-
0-200  
150  
0.5  
0
6.14.7  
6.14.7  
6.14.8  
0.0-10.0  
-
0:Disabled  
1:Enabled (64% or  
less: Trip, FL relay  
activated)  
2:Disabled (50% or  
less: Trip, FL relay  
not activated)  
Hꢆꢃꢃ 0633 Analog input  
disconnection  
%
1
0 (Disabled), 1 - 100%  
0
6.14.9  
detection  
K-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
 Operation panel parameters  
Minimum setting  
unit Panel/  
Communication  
Default User  
setting setting  
Title  
Function  
Unit  
-
Adjustment range  
Reference  
6.15.1  
No.  
Communication  
Hꢇꢉꢉ 0700 Prohibition of change  
-
0:Permitted (EOQF,  
HOQF cannot be  
changed during  
0
parameter settings  
operation.)  
1:Prohibited  
2:Permitted (EOQF,  
HOQF also can be  
changed during  
operation)  
3:Prohibited (except for  
panel frequency  
setting.)  
4:0 + panel emergency  
stop prohibited  
5:1 + panel emergency  
stop prohibited  
6:2 + panel emergency  
stop prohibited  
7:3 + panel emergency  
stop prohibited  
Hꢇꢉꢀ 0701 Unit selection  
-
-
0:0%, Hz (no change)  
1:% to A/V  
0
6.15.2  
2:Free unit selection  
enabled (Hꢇꢉꢂ)  
3:% to A/V, Free unit  
selection enabled  
(Hꢇꢉꢂ)  
Hꢇꢉꢂ 0702 Frequency units  
selection  
Hꢇꢀꢉ 0710 Selection of monitor  
display selection  
-
-
0.01/0.01 0.01-200.0  
1.00  
0
6.15.2  
6.15.3  
11  
-
0:Operation frequency  
(Hz/free unit)  
1:Frequency  
command (Hz/free  
unit)  
2:Output current (%/A)  
 Communication parameters  
Minimum setting  
unit Panel/  
Communication  
Default User  
setting setting  
Title  
Function  
Unit  
-
Adjustment range  
Reference  
6.16  
No.  
Communication  
Hꢋꢉꢉ 0800 Communication baud  
-
0:1200bps  
3
rate  
1:2400bps  
2:4800bps  
3:9600bps  
4:19200bps  
0:NON (non-parity)  
1:EVEN (even parity)  
2:ODD (odd parity)  
0-99  
Hꢋꢉꢀ 0801 Parity  
-
-
1
6.16  
Hꢋꢉꢂ 0802 Inverter number  
Hꢋꢉꢃ 0803 Communication error  
trip time  
-
s
1
1/1  
0
0
6.16  
6.16  
0 (Disabled),  
1 - 100 (s)  
Hꢋꢋꢉ 0880 Free notes  
-
1
0
6.16  
065535 *  
*
Adjustment range of the above mention can set by the computer on the network.  
The operation panel can set to the maximum 9999.  
 Factory setting parameter  
Minimum setting  
unit Panel/  
Communication  
Default User  
setting setting  
Title  
Function  
Unit  
-
Adjustment range  
-
Reference  
-
No.  
Communication  
*
Hꢊꢊꢉ 0990 For factory setting  
-
0
*This function is effective after software version V110.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comK.-7All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Default settings by inverter rating  
Inverter model  
Torque boost  
Motor rated  
current  
Hꢄꢀꢅ  
0.6A  
1.2A  
2.0A  
3.4A  
1.2A  
2.0A  
3.4A  
6.2A  
8.9A  
0.6A  
1.2A  
2.0A  
3.4A  
6.2A  
8.9A  
No-load  
current  
Hꢄꢀꢆ  
70%  
70%  
63%  
59%  
70%  
63%  
59%  
52%  
49%  
70%  
70%  
63%  
59%  
52%  
49%  
70%  
63%  
59%  
52%  
49%  
XD / Hꢀꢇꢂ  
8.5  
VFNC1S-1001P  
VFNC1S-1002P  
VFNC1S-1004P  
VFNC1S-1007P  
VFNC1S-2002P  
VFNC1S-2004P  
VFNC1S-2007P  
VFNC1S-2015P  
VFNC1S-2022P  
VFNC1-2001P  
VFNC1-2002P  
VFNC1-2004P  
VFNC1-2007P  
VFNC1-2015P  
VFNC1-2022P  
VFNC1S-2002PL  
VFNC1S-2004PL  
VFNC1S-2007PL  
VFNC1S-2015PL  
VFNC1S-2022PL  
8.3  
6.2  
5.8  
8.3  
6.2  
5.8  
4.6  
4.4  
8.5  
8.3  
6.2  
5.8  
4.6  
4.4  
8.3  
6.2  
1.2A  
2.0A  
3.4A  
6.2A  
5.8  
4.6  
4.4  
8.9A  
11  
K-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Table of input terminal functions 1  
Function  
No.  
Code  
Function  
Action  
0
1
-
ST  
No function is assigned  
Standby terminal  
No action  
ON : Standby, OFF: Free run  
ON : Forward run,  
OFF : Deceleration stop  
ON : Reverse run,  
2
F
Forward-run command  
3
R
Reverse-run command  
OFF : Deceleration stop (priority to  
reverse run)  
4
5
JOG  
AD2  
Jog run command  
Acceleration/deceleration 2 pattern  
selection  
ON : Jog run, OFF: Canceled  
ON : Acceleration/deceleration 2,  
OFF : Acceleration/deceleration 1  
6
7
8
9
10  
SS1  
SS2  
SS3  
SS4  
RST  
Preset speed command 1  
Preset speed command 2  
Preset speed command 3  
Preset speed command 4  
Reset command  
Selection of preset speeds (up to 15  
speeds) using 4 bits: SS1 to SS4  
ON to OFF: Trip reset  
Trip stop command from external input  
device  
11  
EXT  
ON : G Trip stop  
ON : Forced switching from operation  
panel/internal potentiometer to  
terminal board control  
Operation panel / terminal board  
switching  
12  
PNL/TB  
13  
14  
DB  
PI  
DC braking command  
Prohibition of PI control  
ON : DC braking  
ON : PI control prohibited  
OFF : PI control permitted  
ON : Edition of parameters permitted,  
OFF : Edition of parameter prohibited If  
15  
PWENE  
Permission of parameter editing  
F700 is so set)  
Combination of standby and reset  
commands  
Combination of standby and operation  
panel/terminal board switching  
ON : Simultaneous input of ST and RST  
commands  
ON : Simultaneous input of ST and  
PNL/TB commands  
ON : Simultaneous input of F and JOG  
commands  
ON : Simultaneous input of R and JOG  
commands  
ON : Simultaneous input of F and AD2  
commands  
ON : Simultaneous input of R and AD2  
commands  
ON : Simultaneous input of F and SS1  
commands  
ON : Simultaneous input of R and SS1  
commands  
ON : Simultaneous input of F and SS2  
commands  
ON : Simultaneous input of R and SS2  
commands  
ON : Simultaneous input of F and SS3  
commands  
ON : Simultaneous input of R and SS3  
commands  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
ST+RST  
ST+PNL/TB  
F+JOG  
R+JOG  
F+AD2  
R+AD2  
F+SS1  
11  
Combination of forward run and jog run  
Combination of reverse run and jog run  
Combination of forward run and  
acceleration/deceleration 2  
Combination of reverse run and  
acceleration/deceleration 2  
Combination of forward run and preset  
speed command 1  
Combination of reverse run and preset  
speed command 1  
Combination of forward run and preset  
speed command 2  
Combination of reverse run and preset  
speed command 2  
Combination of forward run and preset  
speed command 3  
Combination of reverse run and preset  
speed command 3  
Combination of forward run and preset  
speed command 4  
R+SS1  
F+SS2  
R+SS2  
F+SS3  
R+SS3  
F+SS4  
ON : Simultaneous input of F and SS4  
commands  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comK.-9All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Table of input terminal functions 2  
Function  
No.  
Code  
R+SS4  
Function  
Action  
Combination of reverse run and preset ON : Simultaneous input of R and SS4  
speed command 4  
29  
commands  
Combination of forward run, preset  
F+SS1+AD2 speed command 1 and  
acceleration/deceleration 2  
ON : Simultaneous input of F, SS1 and  
AD2 commands  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
Combination of reverse run, preset  
R+SS1+AD2 speed command 1 and  
acceleration/deceleration 2  
Combination of forward run, preset  
F+SS2+AD2 speed command 2 and  
acceleration/deceleration 2  
Combination of reverse run, preset  
R+SS2+AD2 speed command 2 and  
acceleration/deceleration 2  
Combination of forward run, preset  
F+SS3+AD2 speed command 3 and  
acceleration/deceleration 2  
Combination of reverse run, preset  
R+SS3+AD2 speed command 3 and  
acceleration/deceleration 2  
Combination of forward run, preset  
F+SS4+AD2 speed command 4 and  
acceleration/deceleration 2  
Combination of reverse run, preset  
R+SS4+AD2 speed command 4 and  
acceleration/deceleration 2  
ON : Simultaneous input of R, SS1 and  
AD2 commands  
ON : Simultaneous input of F, SS2 and  
AD2 commands  
ON : Simultaneous input of R, SS2 and  
AD2 commands  
ON : Simultaneous input of F, SS3 and  
AD2 commands  
ON : Simultaneous input of R, SS3 and  
AD2 commands  
ON : Simultaneous input of F, SS4 and  
AD2 commands  
ON : Simultaneous input of R, SS4 and  
AD2 commands  
Enabled if HOQF = 4 (selectable  
between terminal board and operation  
panel/internal potentiometer)  
ON : VI terminal  
OFF : Internal potentiometer  
ON : No.2 thermal (RV:, Hꢀꢇꢉ,  
Hꢀꢇꢀ, Hꢀꢇꢂ, Hꢀꢇꢃ)  
11  
38  
39  
FCHG  
THR2  
Frequency command forced switching  
No.2 thermal switching  
OFF : No.1 thermal (RV: Setting, XN,  
Hꢄꢉꢊ, XD, VJT)  
ON : No.2 motor (RV:0, Hꢀꢇꢉ  
Hꢀꢇꢀ, Hꢀꢇꢂ Hꢀꢇꢃ Hꢅꢉꢉ  
Hꢅꢉꢀ  
OFF : No.1 motor (Pt: Setting, XN,  
Hꢄꢉꢊ, XD, VJT, CEE,  
FGE)  
ON : F (forward run) / R (reverse run)  
held, 3-wire operation  
OFF : Slowdown stop  
ON : Free run  
,
,
,
,
)
40  
49  
MCHG  
HD  
No.2 motor switching  
*
Operation holding  
(Stop of 3-wire operation)  
54  
55  
56  
FreeRun  
RSTN  
Standby (inversion)  
OFF : Standby  
OFF to ON: Trip reset  
Reset signal (inversion)  
Combination of forward run and standby ON : Simultaneous input of F and ST  
commands commands  
Combination of reverse run and standby ON : Simultaneous input of R and ST  
commands commands  
F+ST  
57  
R+ST  
*This function is effective after software version V110.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.cKo-1m0 . All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Table of output terminal functions 1  
Function  
Code  
LL  
Function  
Action  
No.  
ON : Output frequency higher than NN setting  
OFF : Output frequency equal to or lower than NN  
setting  
0
Frequency lower limit  
1
LLN  
UL  
Inversion of frequency lower limit Inverse output of LL  
ON : Output frequency equal to or higher than WN  
setting  
OFF : Output frequency lower than WN setting  
Inversion of frequency upper limit Inverse output of UL  
2
Frequency upper limit  
3
ULN  
LOW  
ON : Output frequency equal to or higher than  
Low-speed detection signal  
4
Hꢀꢉꢉ setting  
OFF : Output frequency lower than Hꢀꢉꢉ setting  
Inversion of low-speed detection  
signal  
5
6
LOWN  
RCH  
Inverse output of LOW  
ON : Output frequency within command frequency  
±2.5Hz  
OFF : Output frequency exceeding command  
frequency ±2.5Hz  
Designated frequency reach  
signal (completion of  
acceleration/deceleration)  
Inversion of designated  
frequency reach signal (inversion  
of completion of  
7
8
RCHN  
RCHF  
Inverse output of RCH  
acceleration/deceleration)  
ON : Output frequency within Hꢀꢉꢀ setting ±2.5Hz  
OFF : Output frequency exceeding Hꢀꢉꢀ setting  
±2.5Hz  
Set frequency reach signal  
Inversion of set frequency reach  
signal  
Failure FL (trip output)  
Inversion of failure FL (inversion  
of trip output)  
9
RCHFN  
FL  
Inverse output of RCHF  
ON : Inverter trips  
10  
11  
FLN  
Inverse output of FL  
ON : Torque current is held above the torque set with  
Hꢆꢀꢆ for a period of time longer than that set  
with Hꢆꢀꢋ.  
11  
12  
13  
OT  
Over-torque detection  
Inversion of over-torque  
detection  
OTN  
Inverse output of OT  
K-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Order of precedence of combined functions  
    XX: Impossible combination, X: Invalid, +: Valid under some conditions, O: Valid, @: Priority  
 Function No. / Function  
2
3
4
5
6
|
10 11 12 13 14 15 38  
1
54  
39 40  
9
2
3
4
Forward run command  
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
+
O
O
O
X
X
X
O
O
O
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
Reverse run command  
@
+
Jog run command (18/19)  
+
@
@
@
Acceleration/deceleration 2  
selection  
Preset-speed run commands  
1 to 4  
5
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
X
O
O
O
X
O
+
69  
10  
11  
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
Reset command  
O
Trip stop command from  
external input device  
Operation panel/terminal  
board switching  
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
@
12  
13  
14  
O
@
O
O
@
O
O
@
X
O
@
O
O
@
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
O
@
O
O
@
O
DC braking command  
PI control prohibition  
O
O
@
X
O
O
Permission of parameter  
editing  
15  
38  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Frequency commands  
forced switching  
O
1,54  
39  
Free run stop  
@
+
@
+
@
+
@
O
@
+
O
O
O
O
X
X
O
O
O
@
X
@
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
@
@
+
No.2 thermal switching  
No.2 motor switching  
O
O
40  
+
+
+
@
+
X
O
@
11  
   *For the functions of combined terminals (combined functions), refer to the table of their respective functions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.cKo-1m2 . All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
12. Specifications  
12.1  
Models and their standard specifications  
Standard specifications  
Item  
Input voltage  
Specification  
3-phase 200V  
Applicable motor (kW)  
Type  
0.1  
0.2  
0.4  
0.75  
1.5  
2.2  
VFNC1  
Form  
2001P  
0.3  
2002P  
0.6  
2004P  
1.0  
2007P  
1.6  
2015P  
2.9  
2022P  
3.9  
Capacity (kVA) Note 1)  
Rated output current (A)  
Note 2)  
0.7  
1.4  
2.4  
4.0  
7.5  
10.0  
Rated output voltage  
Note 3)  
3-phase 200V to 240V  
Overload current rating  
Voltage-frequency  
Allowable fluctuation  
Ampere Interrupt  
Capacity (A) AIC  
Protective method  
Cooling method  
Color  
60 seconds at 150%, (50%-reduction value)  
3-phase 200V to 240V - 50/60Hz  
25/Voltage +10%, -15% Note 4), frequency ±5%  
1000 1000 1000 5000  
IP20 Enclosed type (JEM 1030)  
Self-cooling  
1000  
5000  
Forced air-cooled  
Munsel 5Y8/0.5  
Charge lamp  
Built-in filter  
LED indicating the charge status of the capacitor in the main circuit  
-
Item  
Input voltage  
Specification  
1-phase 200V  
Applicable motor (kW)  
Type  
0.1  
0.2  
0.4  
0.75  
1.5  
2.2  
VFNC1S  
Form  
-
-
2002P  
0.6  
2004P  
1.0  
2007P  
1.6  
2015P  
2.9  
2022P  
3.9  
Capacity (kVA) Note 1)  
Rated output current (A)  
Note 2)  
-
1.4  
2.4  
4.0  
7.5  
10.0  
12  
Rated output voltage  
Note 3)  
3-phase 200V to 240V  
Overload current rating  
Voltage-frequency  
Allowable fluctuation  
Ampere Interrupt  
Capacity (A) AIC  
Protective method  
Cooling method  
Color  
60 seconds at 150%, (50%-reduction value)  
1-phase 200V to 240V - 50/60Hz  
Voltage +10%, -15% Note 4), frequency ±5%  
-
-
1000  
1000 1000  
5000  
5000  
IP20 Enclosed type (JEM 1030)  
Self-cooling  
Forced air-cooled  
Munsel 5Y8/0.5  
Charge lamp  
LED indicating the charge status of the capacitor in the main circuit  
-
Built-in filter  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comL.-1All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
2.2  
Item  
Specification  
1-phase 100V  
Input voltage  
Applicable motor (kW)  
Type  
0.1  
0.2  
0.4  
0.75  
1.5  
VFNC1S  
1001P  
0.3  
1002P  
0.6  
1004P  
1.0  
1007P  
1.6  
-
-
-
-
Form  
Capacity (kVA) Note 1)  
Rated output current (A)  
Note 2)  
0.7  
1.4  
2.4  
4.0  
-
-
Rated output voltage  
Note 3)  
3-phase 200V to 230V  
60 seconds at 150%, (50%-reduction value)  
1-phase 100V to 115V - 50/60Hz  
Overload current rating  
Voltage-frequency  
Allowable fluctuation  
Ampere Interrupt  
Capacity (A) AIC  
Protective method  
Voltage +10%, -15% Note 4), frequency ±5%  
1000  
1000  
1000 1000  
-
-
-
-
IP20 Enclosed type (JEM 1030)  
Forced  
air-cooled  
Self-cooling  
Cooling method  
Munsel 5Y8/0.5  
Color  
LED indicating the charge status of the capacitor in the main circuit  
-
Charge lamp  
Built-in filter  
Item  
Specification  
1-phase 200V (built-in EM1 noise filter)  
Input voltage  
0.1  
0.2  
0.4  
0.75  
1.5  
2.2  
Applicable motor (kW)  
Type  
VFNC1S  
-
-
2002PL  
0.5  
2004PL  
0.9  
2007PL  
1.6  
2015PL  
2.9  
2022PL  
4.1  
Form  
Capacity (kVA) Note 1)  
Rated output current (A)  
Note 2)  
-
1.2  
2.3  
4.0  
7.5  
10.7  
Rated output voltage  
Note 3)  
3-phase 200V to 240V  
60 seconds at 150%, (50%-reduction value)  
1-phase 200V to 240V - 50/60Hz  
Overload current rating  
Voltage-frequency  
Allowable fluctuation  
Ampere Interrupt  
Capacity (A) AIC  
Protective method  
Cooling method  
Color  
Voltage +10%, -15% Note 4), frequency ±5%  
-
-
1000  
1000 1000  
5000  
5000  
IP20 Enclosed type (JEM 1030)  
Self-cooling  
Forced air-cooled  
12  
Munsel 5Y8/0.5  
None  
Charge lamp  
Built-in filter  
EMC noise filter (Class B)  
Note)  
1. Capacity is calculated at 220V for the 200V models.  
2. Indicates rated output current setting when the PWM carrier frequency (parameter Hꢀꢁꢁ) is 4kHz or  
less.  
If the PWM carrier frequency setting is fixed above 4 kHz, the rated current needs to be reduced. If the  
PWM carrier frequency is set above 4 kHz, it could fall automatically if an over-current flaws during  
acceleration or for any other reason, depending on the amount of current that flows.  
The default setting of the PWN carrier frequency is 12kHz.  
3. Maximum output voltage is the same as the input voltage.  
With regard to 100V models, the output voltage may decrease about 10 to 20 % if motor load is applied.  
When operating VFNC1 in conjunction with general purpose motor (200V), it is necessary to reduce the  
motor load.  
4. ±10% when the inverter is used continuously (load of 100%).  
L-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Item  
Control system  
Specification  
Sinusoidal PWM control  
Related output voltage Adjustable of output voltage in base frequency setting by the correcting supply  
voltge (Unadjustable to any voltage higher than the input voltage).  
Output frequency range 0.5 to 200Hz, default setting: 0.5 to 80Hz, maximum frequency: 30 to 200Hz.  
Minimum setting steps  
of frequency  
operation panel setting, 0.2Hz: analog input (when the max. frequency is 100Hz).  
Frequency accuracy  
Digital setting: within ±0.5% of the max. frequency (-10 to +50°C)  
Analog setting: within ±1.0% of the max. frequency (25 °C ± 10°C)  
V/f constant, Sensorless vector control, base frequency, base frequency voltage and  
torque boost amount adjustable  
Potentiometer on the front panel, external frequency potentiometer (connectable to a  
potentiometer with a rated impedance of 3-10kΩ), V1/S3 terminal (input impedance:  
42kΩ (voltage: 0-10Vdc) or 250Ω (current: 4-20mAdc)). The characteristic can be  
set arbitrarily by two-point setting.  
Voltage/frequency  
characteristics  
Frequency setting  
signal  
Start-up frequency/  
frequency jump  
Adjustable within a range of 0.5 to 10Hz / Up to 1 frequency can be adjusted  
together with their widths.  
PWM carrier frequency Selectable from among 2, 4, 8, 12 and 16kHz (Standard default setting: 12kHz),  
(Note 1)  
Selectable between fixed mode and auto-reduction mode  
Acceleration/decelerati  
on time  
0.1 to 3000 seconds, switchable between acceleration/deceleration time 1 and 2.  
Retry operation  
Number of times of retry selectable (Max. 10 times).  
If the protection function is activated, the retry function restarts on completion of a  
check of the main circuit.  
Dynamic braking  
Charging of capacitor (Deceleration time can be shortened by activating Forced  
Shortened Deceleration mode.)  
Dynamic braking  
DC braking  
Driving circuit for braking resistor is not provided.  
Braking start-up frequency: 0 to maximum frequency, braking rate: 0 to 100%,  
braking time: 0 to 20 seconds.  
Input terminal functions Selectable from among 45 functions, such as forward/reverse run input signal, jog  
(selectable)  
run input signal, standby signal, preset-speed operation input signal, and reset input  
signal (Also, selectable between sink/source)  
Output terminal  
Selectable from among 14 functions, such as frequency lower limit output signal,  
functions (selectable) frequency upper limit output signal, low-speed detection output signal, and specified  
speed attainment output signal. Open collector and relay output possible  
Failure detection signal 1c-contact output: 250Vac-1A- cosφ = 0.4  
Output for frequency  
PWM output: (1mAdc full-scale DC ammeter or 7.5Vdc full-scale DC  
ammeter/Rectifier-type AC voltmeter, 225% current Max. 1mAdc, 7.5Vdc full-scale)  
meter/output for  
12  
ammeter  
Protective function  
Stall prevention, current limitation, over-current, output short circuit, over-voltage,  
over-voltage limitation, undervoltage, ground fault, power supply phase failure,  
output phase failure, overload protection by electronic thermal function, armature  
over-load at start-up, load-side over-torque at start, overheating prevention,  
detection of analog signal break.  
Protection against  
momentary power  
failure  
Auto-restart/non-stop control after momentary power failure.  
Electronic thermal  
characteristics  
4-digit 7-segments  
LED  
Switching between standard motor/constant-torque VF motor, overload trip, overload  
stall selection.  
Frequency: inverter output frequency.  
Alarm : Stall alarm "C", overvoltage alarm "P", overload alarm "L", overheat alarm "H".  
Status : Inverter status (frequency, cause of activation of protective function,  
input/output voltage, output current, etc.) and parameter settings.  
Free-unit display : Arbitrary unit (e.g. rotating speed) corresponding to output  
frequency.  
Indicator  
Lamps indicating the inverter status by lighting or blinking, such as RUN lamp and  
PRG lamp.  
Use environments  
Indoor, altitude: 1000m (Max.), not exposed to direct sunlight, corrosive gas,  
explosive gas or vibration (less than 5.9m/s2) (10 to 55Hz).  
Ambient temperature -10 to 50°C Note)1.2.3  
Storage temperature -20 to +65°C  
Relative humidity  
20 to 93% (free from condensation and vapor).  
Note)1. Above 40°C: Remove the protective seal from the top of VF-nC1.  
Note)2. When installing inverters side by side (without allowing space between them), detach the label on  
the top surface of each inverter and use them where the ambient temperature is below 40°C.  
Note)3. Single-phase 200V models (built-in EMI noise filter) should be used where the ambient  
temperature will not rise above 40°C.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comL.-3All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
12.2  
External dimensions/weights  
External dimensions/weights  
Applicable  
motor (kW)  
0.2  
0.4  
0.75  
1.5  
2.2  
0.1  
0.2  
0.4  
0.75  
1.5  
2.2  
0.1  
0.2  
0.4  
0.75  
0.2  
0.4  
Dimensions (mm)  
Approx.  
weight (kg)  
1.0  
1.0  
1.0  
1.5  
1.5  
1.0  
1.0  
1.0  
1.0  
1.5  
1.5  
1.0  
1.0  
1.0  
1.5  
Input voltage  
Type  
Drawing  
W
H
D
W1  
H1  
D1  
VFNC1S-2002P  
VFNC1S-2004P  
VFNC1S-2007P  
VFNC1S-2015P  
VFNC1S-2022P  
VFNC1-2001P  
VFNC1-2002P  
VFNC1-2004P  
VFNC1-2007P  
VFNC1-2015P  
VFNC1-2022P  
VFNC1S-1001P  
VFNC1S-1002P  
VFNC1S-1004P  
VFNC1S-1007P  
VFNC1S-2002PL  
VFNC1S-2004PL  
VFNC1S-2007PL  
VFNC1S-2015PL  
VFNC1S-2022PL  
100  
124  
137  
72  
60  
A
B
1-phase 200V  
(Standard)  
117  
72  
155  
100  
106  
60  
A
B
124  
137  
3-phase 200V  
1-phase 100V  
117  
142  
155  
100  
106  
131  
8.5  
72  
117  
72  
60  
106  
60  
A
B
A
124  
155  
100  
124  
137  
1.0  
1.0  
1.0  
1.5  
1-phase 200V  
(Europe)  
0.75  
1.5  
2.2  
117  
155  
106  
B
1.5  
External dimensions  
φ5  
12  
W1(Installation  
dimension)  
R2.5  
W
Fig. A  
φ
5
(
)
W1 Installation dimension  
R2.5  
W
Fig. B  
L-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
13. Before making a service call– Trip information and remedies  
13.1  
Trip causes/warnings and remedies  
When a problem arises, diagnose it in accordance with the following table. If it is found that  
replacement of parts is required or the problem cannot be solved by any remedy described in the  
table, contact your Toshiba dealer.  
[Trip information: FL relay activated]  
Alarm  
code  
Error  
code  
Problem  
Possible causes  
Remedies  
QEꢀ  
0001  
Overcurrent during  
acceleration  
Overcurrent flowing  
in element during  
acceleration  
The acceleration time CEE is  
too short.  
The V/F setting is improper.  
A restart signal is input to the  
rotating motor after a  
momentary stop, etc.  
A special motor (e.g. motor with frequency Hꢁꢂꢂ.  
a small impedance) is used.  
The deceleration time FGE is  
too short.  
Increase the acceleration time  
CEE.  
Check the V/F parameter.  
Use Hꢁꢂꢀ (auto-restart) and  
Hꢁꢂꢃ (ride-through control).  
Increase or decrease the carrier  
QEꢀR 0025  
QEꢃ  
0002  
Overcurrent during  
deceleration  
Overcurrent flowing  
in element during  
acceleration  
Increase the deceleration time  
FGE.  
QEꢃR 0026  
QEꢁ  
0003  
Overcurrent during  
operation  
Overcurrent flowing  
in element during  
acceleration  
The load fluctuates abruptly.  
The load is in an abnormal  
condition.  
Reduce the load fluctuation.  
Check the load (operated  
machine).  
QEꢁR 0027  
QEC  
QEN  
0005  
0004  
Arm overcurrent at  
start-up  
Overcurrent (An  
overcurrent on the  
load side at start-up)  
A main circuit element is  
defective.  
The insulation of the output  
main circuit or motor is  
defective.  
Make a service call.  
Check the cables and wires for  
defective insulation.  
The motor has too small  
impedance.  
The input voltage fluctuates  
abnormally.  
13  
QRꢀ  
000A  
Overvoltage during  
acceleration  
Insert a suitable input reactor.  
The power supply has a  
capacity of 200kVA or more.  
A power factor improvement  
capacitor is opened or closed.  
A system using a thyrister is  
connected to the same power  
distribution line.  
A restart signal is input to the  
rotating motor after a  
Use Hꢁꢂꢀ (auto-restart) and  
Hꢁꢂꢃ (ride-through control).  
momentary stop, etc.  
(Continued overleaf)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comM.-1All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
(Continued)  
Alarm  
code  
Error  
code  
Problem  
Possible causes  
Remedies  
QRꢃ  
000B  
000C  
000D  
Overvoltage during  
deceleration  
The deceleration time FGE is  
too short. (Regenerative  
energy is too large.)  
Hꢁꢂꢄ (overvoltage limit  
operation) is off.  
Increase the deceleration time  
FGE.  
Enable Hꢁꢂꢄ (overvoltage  
limit operation).  
Insert a suitable input reactor.  
The input voltage fluctuates  
abnormally.  
The power supply has a  
capacity of 200kVA or more.  
A power factor improvement  
capacitor is opened or closed.  
A system using a thyristor is  
connected to the same power  
distribution line.  
QRꢁ  
Overvoltage during  
constant-speed  
operation  
The input voltage fluctuates  
abnormally.  
Insert a suitable input reactor.  
The power supply has a  
capacity of 200kVA or more.  
A power factor improvement  
capacitor is opened or closed.  
A system using a thyristor is  
connected to the same power  
distribution line.  
The motor is in a regenerative  
state because the load causes  
the motor to run at a frequency  
higher than the inverter output  
frequency.  
The acceleration time ACC is  
too short.  
QNꢀ  
Inverter overload  
Increase the acceleration time  
CEE.  
Reduce the DC braking amount  
Hꢃꢄꢀ and the DC braking  
time Hꢃꢄꢃ.  
The DC braking amount is too  
large.  
The V/F setting is improper.  
A restart signal is input to the  
rotating motor after a  
Check the V/F parameter  
setting.  
Use Hꢁꢂꢀ (auto-restart) and  
Hꢁꢂꢃ  
13  
momentary stop, etc.  
(ride-through control).  
Use an inverter with a larger  
rating.  
Check the V/F parameter  
setting.  
Check the load (operated  
machine).  
Adjust QNO to the overload  
that the motor can withstand  
during operation in a low speed  
range.  
The load is too large.  
QNꢃ  
000E  
0009  
Motor overload  
The V/F setting is improper.  
The motor is locked up.  
Low-speed operation is  
performed continuously.  
An excessive load is applied to  
the motor during operation.  
*
GRJꢂ  
Output phase failure  
A phase failure occurred in the  
output line of the main circuit.  
Check the main circuit output  
line, motor, etc., for phase  
failure.  
Enable Hꢅꢂꢄ (Output phase  
failure detection).  
(Continued overleaf)  
M-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
(Continued)  
Alarm  
code  
Error  
code  
*
GRJꢀ  
Problem  
Input phase failure  
Possible causes  
Remedies  
0008  
A phase failure occurred in the  
input line of the main circuit.  
The inverter may trip because of  
GRJꢀ if switching between  
Check the main circuit input line  
for phase failure.  
Enable Hꢅꢂꢆ (input phase  
failure detection). Set the  
acceleration and deceleration is Hꢅꢂꢆ parameter to 0.  
done in succession at intervals  
of less than 1 second.  
QJ  
0010  
Overheat  
The cooling fan does not rotate.  
The ambient temperature is too  
high.  
Restart the operation by  
resetting the inverter after it has  
cooled down enough.  
The fan requires replacement if  
it does not rotate during  
operation.  
Secure sufficient space around  
the inverter.  
Do not place any heat-  
generating device near the  
inverter.  
The vent is blocked up.  
A heat generating device is  
installed close to the inverter.  
The thermistor in the unit is  
broken.  
Make a service call.  
001E  
Undervoltage trip  
(main circuit)  
WRꢀ  
The input voltage (in the main  
circuit) is too low.  
Check the input voltage.  
Enable Hꢅꢃꢇ (undervoltage  
trip selection).  
To cope with a momentary stop  
due to undervoltage, enable  
Hꢁꢂꢃ (ride-through control)  
and Hꢁꢂꢀ (auto-restart).  
Check the cable and the motor  
for ground faults.  
GHꢃ  
G
0022  
0011  
Ground fault trip  
Arm overcurrent  
A ground fault occurs in the  
output cable or the motor.  
A main circuit element is  
defective.  
During automatic operation or  
remote operation, a stop  
command is entered from the  
operation panel or a remote  
input device.  
Make a service call.  
Emergency stop  
Reset the inverter.  
13  
GTTꢃ 0015  
GTTꢁ 0016  
GTTꢈ 0017  
GTTꢄ 0018  
Main unit RAM fault  
Main unit ROM fault  
CPU fault trip  
Remote control  
error  
The control RAM is defective.  
The control ROM is defective.  
The control CPU is defective.  
An error arises during remote  
operation.  
Make a service call.  
Make a service call.  
Make a service call.  
Check the remote control  
device, cables, etc.  
GTTꢇ 001A  
Current defector  
fault  
EEPROM fault 1  
The current detector is defective.  
Make a service call.  
GGRꢀ 0012  
A data writing error occurs.  
Turn off the inverter, then turn it  
on again. If it does not recover  
from the error, make a service  
call.  
GGRꢃ 0013  
EEPROM fault 2  
EEPROM fault 3  
Power supply is cut off during  
V[R operation and data  
writing is aborted.  
Turn the power off temporarily  
and turn it back on, and then try  
V[R operation again.  
Turn off the inverter, then turn it  
on again. If it does not recover  
from the error, make a service  
call.  
GGRꢁ 0014  
A data writing error occurs.  
*
Gꢉꢀꢆ  
0032  
Break in analog  
signal cable  
The signal input via VI/S3 is  
below the analog signal  
Check the cables for breaks  
and change the setting of  
detection level set with Hꢅꢁꢁ. Hꢅꢁꢁ if no breaks are found.  
(Continued overleaf)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comM.-3All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
(Continued)  
Alarm  
code  
Error  
code  
Problem  
Possible causes  
Remedies  
Gꢉꢀꢊ 0033  
CPU  
communications  
error  
A communications error occurs  
between control CPUs.  
Make a service call.  
Gꢉꢃꢂ 0034  
Excessive torque  
boosted  
The torque boost parameter  
XD is set too high.  
The impedance of the motor is  
too small.  
Decrease the setting of the  
torque boost parameter XD  
If no improvement results,  
contact Toshiba Technical  
Support Center.  
 * With a parameter, you can choose between trip-on and -off.  
[Alarm information] Each message in the table is displayed to give a warning but does not cause the  
inverter to trip.  
Error  
code  
Problem  
Possible causes  
Remedies  
QHH  
ST terminal OFF  
The ST-CC circuit is opened.  
The supply voltage between R,  
S and T is under voltage.  
Close the ST-CC circuit.  
Measure the main circuit supply  
voltage.  
OQHH Undervoltage in  
main circuit  
If the voltage is at a normal  
level, the inverter requires  
repairing.  
TVT[ Retry in process  
The inverter is in the process of  
retry.  
A momentary stop occurred.  
The inverter is normal if it  
restarts after several tens of  
seconds.  
The inverter restarts  
automatically. Be careful of  
the machine because it may  
suddenly restart.  
GTTꢀ Frequency point  
The frequency setting signals at Set the frequency setting  
setting error  
points 1 and 2 are set too close  
to each other.  
signals at points 1 and 2 apart  
from each other.  
ENT  
Clear command  
acceptable  
This message is displayed  
when pressing the STOP key  
while an error code is  
Press the STOP key again to  
clear the trip.  
13  
displayed.  
GQHH Emergency stop  
command  
The operation panel is used to  
stop the operation in automatic  
control or remote control mode.  
Press the STOP key for an  
emergency stop.  
To cancel the emergency stop,  
press any other key.  
Check whether the setting is  
made correctly.  
acceptable  
JK/NQ Setting error alarm /  
An error code and  
data are displayed  
alternately twice  
An error is found in a setting  
when data is reading or writing.  
each.  
JGCF Display of first/last  
The first or last data item in the  
CWJ/CWH data group is  
displayed.  
Press the MON key to exit the  
data group.  
data items  
GPF  
FD  
DC braking  
DC braking in process  
The message goes off in several  
tens of seconds if no problem  
occurs. Note)  
Gꢀ  
Flowing out of  
excess number of  
digits  
The numeric value displayed  
(e.g., frequency) has a larger  
number of digits than the  
display panel. (The number  
next to the E refers to the  
excess number of digits.)  
When a frequency is displayed,  
decrease the setting of Hꢀꢁꢂ  
(free unit).  
(Continued overleaf)  
M-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
(Continued)  
Error  
Problem  
Possible causes  
Remedies  
code  
UVQR Momentary power  
failure slowdown  
The slowdown stop prohibition  
function set with Hꢃꢁꢂ  
(momentary power failure ride-  
through operation) is activated.  
Parameters are being initialized  
to default values.  
To restart operation, reset the  
inverter or input an operation  
signal again.  
stop prohibition  
function activated  
KPKV Parameters in the  
process of  
Normal if the message  
disappears after a while  
(several seconds to several  
tens of seconds).  
Normal if the message  
disappears after a while  
(several seconds to several  
tens of seconds). (European  
model only)  
initialization  
Setup parameters in  
the process of being  
set  
Setup parameters are in the  
process of being set.  
Gꢉꢀꢇ Operation panel key  
The RUN or STOP key is held Check the operation panel.  
down for more than 5 seconds.  
fault  
The RUN or STOP key is faulty.  
The input terminal is switched Check whether cables are  
to source logic mode.  
GꢉUQ Source logic  
switching  
connected correctly, and then  
specify a proper logic.  
confirmation alarm  
Check whether cables are  
connected correctly, and then  
reset the inverter or turn it off  
temporarily and turn it back on.  
Logics will be switched.  
GꢉUK Source logic  
switching  
The input terminal is switched Check whether cables are  
to source logic mode.  
connected correctly, and then  
specify a proper logic.  
confirmation alarm  
Check whether cables are  
connected correctly, and then  
reset the inverter or turn it off  
temporarily and turn it back on.  
Logics will be switched.  
(Note) When the ON/OFF function is selected for DC braking (DB), using the input terminal  
selection parameter, you can judge the inverter to be normal if " FD" disappears when  
opening the circuit between the terminal and CC.  
13  
[Alarms displayed during operation]  
E
R
N
J
Overcurrent alarm  
Overvoltage alarm  
Overload alarm  
Overheat alarm  
Same as QE (overcurrent)  
Same as QR (overvoltage)  
Same as QNꢀ/QNꢃ (overload)  
Same as QJ (overheat)  
If two or more problems arise simultaneously, one of the following alarms appears and blinks.  
ER, RN, ERN  
The blinking alarms E, R, N, J are displayed in this order from left to right.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comM.-5All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
13.2  
Restoring the inverter from a trip  
Do not reset the inverter when tripped because of a failure or error before eliminating the cause.  
Resetting the tripped inverter before eliminating the problem causes it to trip again.  
The inverter can be restored from a trip by any of the following operations:  
(1) By turning off the power (Keep the inverter off until the LED turns off.)  
Note) Refer to 6.1 4.2 (inverter trip retention selection Hꢅꢂꢃ) for details.  
(2) By means of an external signal [Short-circuiting of control terminals RST and CC  
(Assignment of functions to input terminals is necessary)]  
(3) By operation panel operation  
(4) By inputting a trip clear signal from a remote input device  
(Refer to the Communications Equipment User’s Manual for details.)  
To reset the inverter by operation panel operation, follow these steps.  
1. Press the STOP key and make sure that ENT is displayed.  
2. Pressing the STOP key again will reset the inverter if the cause of the trip has already been  
eliminated.  
When any overload function [QNꢀ : inverter overload, QNꢃ : motor overload,] is active, the  
inverter cannot be reset by inputting a reset signal from an external device or by operation  
panel operation before the virtual cooling time has passed.  
Virtual cooling time ・・・・ QNꢀ : about 30 seconds after the occurrence of a trip  
QNꢃ : about 120 seconds after the occurrence of a trip  
[Caution]  
Turning the inverter off then turning it on again resets the inverter immediately. You can  
use this mode of resetting if there is a need to reset the inverter immediately. Note,  
however, that this operation may damage the system or the motor if it is repeated  
frequently.  
13  
If the inverter trips because of overheating (QJ), do not reset the inverter immediately but wait  
until the temperature in the inverter comes down, because its internal temperature is monitored.  
M-6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
13.3  
If the motor does not run while no trip message is displayed ...  
If the motor does not run while no trip message is displayed, follow these steps to track down the  
cause.  
YES :  
The motor does not run.  
NO  
:
Is the 7-segment LED  
extinguished?  
Check the power supply and the MCCB.  
Is power being supplied normally?  
Supply the  
power normally.  
Make a service call.  
Is QHH displayed?  
The ST-CC circuit is opened. Close the circuit between CC and the  
terminal to which the ST (standby) function on the control circuit  
terminal is assigned. (See 6.2.)  
Is any failure message  
displayed? (See 13.1.)  
Track down and eliminate the cause of the failure and then reset the  
inverter. See 13.2.  
Are TVT[ and a failure  
message displayed  
alternately?  
The inverter is in the process of retrying. The retry function can be  
disabled by normal or emergency stop operation, or by turning off the  
inverter.  
The inverter is receiving an operation signal. Check whether it has  
received an operation command. (Check to see that the frequency setting  
signal level is not zero.)  
Is the RUN lamp  
blinking?  
13  
Check to see that the frequency setting signal is not set at zero.  
Check the settings of the frequency setting signal parameters HOQF.  
(See 5.1.)  
Is :  
.ꢂ  
displayed?  
Check the frequency setting signal points 1 and 2 settings. (See 6.4.)  
Check that the start-up frequency is not higher than the operation  
frequency. (See 6.5.)  
Check that the frequency setting (preset-speed operation frequency,  
etc.) is not set at zero.  
Check that the motor is not under a too large load or not locked up.  
Reduce the load if necessary.  
Determine the cause, using the parameter display function and the status monitoring function.  
Refer to Section 11 for the parameter display function or Section 8 for the status motoring function.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comM.-7All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
13.4  
How to determine the causes of other problems  
The following table provides a listing of other problems, their possible causes and remedies.  
Problems  
Causes and remedies  
The motor runs in  
Invert the phases of the output terminals U, V and W.  
the wrong direction. Invert the forward/reverse run-signal terminals of the external input  
device. (See 6.2 "Assignment of functions to control terminals".)  
The motor runs but  
its speed does not  
change normally.  
The load is too heavy.  
Reduce the load.  
The soft stall function is activated.  
Disable the soft stall function. (See 5.10.)  
The maximum frequency HJ and the upper limit frequency WN are set  
too low.  
Increase the maximum frequency HJ and the upper limit frequency  
WN.  
The frequency setting signal is too low.  
Check the signal set value, circuit, cables, etc.  
Check the setting characteristics (point 1 and point 2 settings) of the  
frequency setting signal parameters. (See 6.4.)  
If the motor runs at a low speed, check to see that the stall prevention  
function is activated because the torque boost amount is too large.  
Adjust the torque boost amount (XD) and the acceleration time (CEE).  
(See 5.1.)  
The motor does not The acceleration time (CEE) or the deceleration time (FGE) is set too  
accelerate or  
short.  
decelerate smoothly.  
A too large current  
flows into the motor.  
Increase the acceleration time (CEE) or the deceleration time (FGE).  
The load is too heavy.  
Reduce the load.  
If the motor runs at a low speed, check whether the torque boost amount  
is too large. (See 5.9.)  
The motor runs at a The motor has an improper voltage rating.  
higher or lower  
speed than the  
specified one.  
Use a motor with a proper voltage rating.  
The motor terminal voltage is too low.  
Check the setting of the base frequency voltage parameter (Hꢈꢂꢊ).  
(See 6.12.)  
Replace the cable with a cable larger in diameter.  
The reduction gear ratio, etc., are not set properly.  
Adjust the reduction gear ratio, etc.  
13  
The output frequency is not set correctly.  
Check the output frequency range.  
Adjust the base frequency. (See 5.8.)  
The load is too heavy or too light.  
The motor speed  
fluctuates during  
operation.  
Reduce the load fluctuation.  
The inverter or motor used does not have a rating large enough to drive  
the load.  
Use an inverter or motor with a rating large enough.  
Check whether the frequency setting signal changes.  
Change the setting of the parameter Hꢇꢂꢂ (prohibition of change of  
Parameter settings  
cannot be changed. parameter setting) to ..ꢈꢋꢅ (permitted) if it is set at ...ꢇ  
(prohibited).  
* For safety’s sake, some parameters cannot be set during operation.  
(See 4.1.4.)  
How to cope with parameter setting-related problems  
If you forget  
You can search for all reset parameters and change their settings.  
* Refer to 4.1.3 for details.  
parameters which  
have been reset  
If you want to return  
You can return all parameters which have been reset to their default  
all reset parameters  
settings.  
to their respective  
* Refer to 4.1.5 for details.  
default settings  
M-8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
14. Inspection and maintenance  
Danger  
The equipment must be inspected every day.  
If the equipment is not inspected and maintained, errors and malfunctions may not be  
discovered which could lead to accidents.  
Mandatory  
Before inspection, perform the following steps.  
Shut off all input power to the inverter.  
Wait for at least 15 minutes and check that the charge lamp is no longer lit.  
Use a tester that can measure DC voltages (800V DC or more), and check that the  
voltage to the DC main circuits (across PA-PC) does not exceed 45V.  
Performing an inspection without carrying out these steps first could lead to electric shock.  
Be sure to inspect the inverter regularly and periodically to prevent it from breaking down because  
of the environment of use, such as temperature, humidity, dust and vibration, or deterioration of its  
components with aging.  
14.1  
Regular inspection  
Since electronic parts are susceptible to heat, install the inverter in a cool, well-ventilated and dust-  
free place. This is essential for increasing the service life.  
The purpose of regular inspections is to maintain the correct environment of use and to find any  
sign of failure or malfunction by comparing current operation data with past operation records.  
Inspection procedure  
Subject of  
Criteria for judgment  
Inspection  
cycle  
inspection  
Inspection item  
Inspection method  
1) Dust, temperature Occasionally 1) Visual check, check by  
1) Improve the environment if  
it is found to be  
unfavorable.  
and gas  
means of a thermometer,  
smell check  
1. Indoor  
environment  
2) Drops of water or Occasionally 2) Visual check  
other liquid  
2) Check for any trace of  
water condensation.  
3) Max. temperature: 40°C  
(50°C inside the cabinet)  
If something unusual is found,  
open the door and check the  
transformer, reactors,  
contactors, relays, cooling fan,  
etc., inside. If necessary, stop  
the operation.  
3) Room  
temperature  
Occasionally 3) Check by means of a  
thermometer  
2. Units and  
components  
1) Vibration and  
noise  
Occasionally Tactile check of the cabinet  
14  
1) Load current  
Occasionally Moving-iron type AC  
ammeter  
Occasionally Rectifier type AC voltmeter  
Occasionally Thermometer  
To be within the rated  
current, voltage and  
temperature.  
No significant difference from  
data collected in a normal  
state.  
3. Operation  
data  
2) Voltage (*)  
3) Temperature  
(output side)  
*) The voltage measured may slightly vary from voltmeter to voltmeter. When measuring the  
voltage, always take readings from the same circuit tester or voltmeter.  
Check points  
1. Something unusual in the installation environment  
2. Something unusual in the cooling system  
3. Unusual vibration or noise  
4. Overheating or discoloration  
5. Unusual odor  
6. Unusual motor vibration, noise or overheating  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comN.-1All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
14.2  
Periodical inspection  
Make a periodical inspection at intervals of 3 or 6 months depending on the operating conditions.  
Danger  
Before inspection, perform the following steps.  
Shut off all input power to the inverter.  
Wait for at least 15 minutes and check that the charge lamp is no longer lit.  
Use a tester that can measure DC voltages (800V DC or more), and check that the  
voltage to the DC main circuits (across PA-PC) does not exceed 45V.  
Mandatory  
Prohibited  
Performing an inspection without carrying out these steps first could lead to electric shock.  
Never replace any part.  
This could be a cause of electric shock, fire or bodily injury. To replace parts, call the local  
sales agency.  
Check items  
1. Check to see if all screwed terminals are tightened firmly. If any screw is found loose, tighten it  
again with a screwdriver.  
2. Check to see if all crimped terminals are fixed properly. Check them visually to see that there  
is no trace of overheating around any of them.  
3. Check visually all cables and wires for damage.  
4. With a vacuum cleaner, remove dirt and dust, especially from the vents and the printed circuit  
boards. Always keep them clean to prevent an accident due to dirt or dust.  
5. When leaving the inverter unused for a long time, check it for functioning once every 2 years or  
so by supplying it with electricity for at least 5 hours with the motor disconnected. It is  
advisable not to supply the commercial power directly to the inverter but to gradually increase  
the power supply voltage with a transformer.  
6. If the need arises, conduct an insulation test on the main circuit terminal board only, using a  
500V insulation tester. Never conduct an insulation test on control terminals other than  
terminals on the printed circuit board or on control terminals. When testing the motor for  
insulation performance, separate it from the inverter in advance by disconnecting the cables  
from the inverter output terminals U, V and W. When conducting an insulation test on  
peripheral circuits other than the motor circuit, disconnect all cables from the inverter so that no  
voltage is applied to the inverter during the test.  
14  
(Note) Before an insulation test, always disconnect all cables from the main circuit terminal board  
and test the inverter separately from other equipment.  
R/L1  
U/T1  
S/L2  
V/T2  
T/L3  
W/T3  
500V insulation tester  
(megger)  
7. Never test the inverter for pressure. A pressure test may cause damage to its components.  
8. Voltage and temperature check  
Recommended voltmeter:  
____  
Input side  
Moving-iron type voltmeter  
(
)
__  
Output side  
Rectifier type voltmeter  
(
)
It will be very helpful for detecting a defect if you always measure and record the ambient  
temperature before, during and after the operation.  
N-2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
Replacement of expendable parts  
The inverter is composed of a large number of electronic parts including semiconductor devices.  
The following parts deteriorate with the passage of time because of their composition or physical  
properties. The use of aged or deteriorated parts leads to degradation in the performance or a  
breakdown of the inverter. To avoid such trouble, the inverter should be checked periodically.  
No parts of the inverter except the cooling fan can be replaced individually, and the whole inverter  
needs to be replaced if a significant defect is found in it.  
Note) Generally, the life of a part depends on the ambient temperature and the conditions of use.  
The life spans listed below are applicable to parts when used under normal environmental  
conditions.  
1) Cooling fan  
The fan, which cools down heat-generating parts, has a service life of about 30,000 hours  
(about 2 or 3 years of continuous operation). The fan also needs to be replaced if it makes a  
noise or vibrates abnormally.  
2) Smoothing capacitor  
The smoothing aluminum electrolytic capacitor in the main circuit DC section degrades in  
performance because of ripple currents, etc. It becomes necessary to replace the capacitor  
after it is used for about 5 years under normal conditions.  
<Criteria for appearance check>  
Absence of liquid leak  
Safety valve in the depressed position  
Measurement of electrostatic capacitance and insulation resistance  
Note: For the replacement of consumable parts, ask your nearest Toshiba branch or office.  
The operation time is helpful for roughly determining the time of replacement. For the replacement  
of parts, contact the service network or Toshiba branch office printed on the back cover of this  
instruction manual.  
Standard replacement cycles of principal parts  
The table below provides a listing of the replacement cycles of parts when used under normal  
conditions (average ambient temperature: 30°C, load factor: not more than 80%, operation time: 12  
hours per day). The replacement cycle of each part does not mean its service life but the number  
of years over which its failure rate does not increase significantly.  
14  
Standard  
replacement cycle  
2 to 3 years  
Part name  
Cooling fan  
Replacement mode and others  
Replacement with a new one  
Replace with a new one (depending on  
the check results)  
Whether to replace or not depends on  
the check results  
Smoothing capacitor  
Contactors and relays  
Timer  
5 years  
-
Whether to replace or not depends on  
the operation time  
-
Fuse  
10 years  
5 years  
Replacement with a new one  
Replace with a new circuit board  
(depending on the check results)  
Aluminum capacitor on printed  
circuit board  
(Extract from "Guide to periodical inspections of general-purpose inverters" issued by the Japan  
Electrical Manufacturers’ Association.)  
Note) The life of a part greatly varies depending on the environment of use.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comN.-3All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
14.3  
14.4  
Making a call for servicing  
For the Toshiba service network, refer to the back cover of this instruction manual. If defective  
conditions are encountered, please contact the Toshiba service section in charge via your Toshiba  
dealer.  
When making a call for servicing, please inform us of the contents of the rating label on the right  
panel of the inverter, the presence or absence of optional devices, etc., in addition to the details of  
the failure.  
Keeping the inverter in storage  
Take the following precautions when keeping the inverter in storage temporarily or for a long period  
of time.  
1. Store the inverter in a well-ventilated place away from heat, damp, dust and metal powder.  
2. If the printed circuit board in your inverter has an anti-static cover (black cover), do not leave it  
detached from the circuit board during storage, though the cover must be detached before  
turning on the inverter.  
3. If no power is supplied to the inverter for a long time, the performance of its large-capacity  
electrolytic capacitor declines.  
When leaving the inverter unused for a long time, supply it with electricity once every two years,  
for 5 hours or more each, to recover the performance of the large-capacity electrolytic capacitor  
and also to check the function of the inverter. It is advisable not to supply the commercial power  
directly to the inverter but to gradually increase the power supply voltage with a transformer, etc.  
14  
N-4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
15. Warranty  
Any part of the inverter that proves defective will be repaired and adjusted free of charge under the  
following conditions:  
1. This warranty applies only to the inverter main unit.  
2. Any part of the inverter which fails or is damaged under normal use within twelve months from  
the date of delivery shall be repaired free of charge.  
3. For the following kinds of failure or damage, the repair cost shall be borne by the customer even  
within the warranty period.  
Failure or damage caused by improper or incorrect use or handling, or unauthorized repair or  
modification of the inverter  
Failure or damage caused by the inverter falling or an accident during transportation after the  
purchase  
Failure or damage caused by fire, salty water or wind, corrosive gas, earthquake, storm or  
flood, lightning, abnormal voltage supply, or other natural disasters  
Failure or damage caused by the use of the inverter for any purpose or application other than  
the intended one  
4. All expenses incurred by Toshiba for on-site services shall be charged to the customer, unless a  
service contract is signed beforehand between the customer and Toshiba, in which case the  
service contract has priority over this warranty.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comO.-1All Manuals Search And Download.  
E6581090  
16. Disposal of the inverter  
   Warning  
If you throw away the inverter, have it done by a specialist in industry waste  
disposal*. If you throw away the inverter by yourself, this can result in explosion of  
capacitor or produce noxious gases, resulting in injury.  
Mandatory  
(*) Persons who specialize in the processing of waste and known as "industrial waste product  
collectors and transporters" or "industrial waste disposal persons."  
If the collection, transport and disposal of industrial waste is done by someone who is not  
licensed for that job, it is a punishable violation of the law. (Law on Waste Disposal and  
Cleaning)  
For safety’s sake, do not dispose of the disused inverter yourself but ask an industrial waste  
disposal agent.  
Disposing of the inverter improperly could cause its capacitor to explode and emit toxic gas, causing  
injury to persons.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.comP.-1All Manuals Search And Download.  
TOSHIBA INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION  
13131 West Little York RD., Houston,  
TX 77041, U.S.A  
TOSHIBA  
OVERSEAS SALES & MARKETING DEPT.  
ELECTRICAL APPARATUS & MEASUREMENT  
DIV.  
TEL: +1-713-466-0277  
FAX: +1-713-896-5226  
INDUSTRIAL AND POWER  
SYSTEM & SERVICES COMPANY  
TOSHIBA ASIA PACIFIC PTE., LTD  
152 Beach Rd., #16-00 Gateway East,  
Singapore 189721  
TEL: +65-6297-0900  
FAX: +65-6297-5510  
1-1, Shibaura 1-chome, Minato-Ku,  
Tokyo 105-8001, Japan  
TEL: +81-(0)3-3457-4911  
FAX: +8-(0)3-5444-9268  
TOSHIBA CHINA CO., LTD  
23rd Floor, HSBC Tower, 101 Yin Cheng  
East Road, Pudong New Area, Shanghai  
200120, The People's Repubulic of China  
TEL: +86-(0)21-6841-5666  
FAX: +86-(0)21-6841-1161  
TOSHIBA INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION  
PTY., LTD  
2 Morton Street Parramatta, NSW2150, Australia  
TEL: +61-(0)2-9768-6600  
FAX: +61-(0)2-9890-7542  
TOSHIBA INFORMATION, INDUSTRIAL AND  
POWER SYSTEMS TAIWAN CORP.  
6F, No66, Sec1 Shin Sheng N.RD, Taipei,  
Taiwan  
TEL: +886-(0)2-2581-3639  
FAX: +886-(0)2-2581-3631  
For further information, please contact your nearest Toshiba Liaison Representative or International  
Operations - Producer Goods.  
The data given in this manual are subject to change without notice.  
2004-10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

TDK Network Card HHM Series HHM1564A User Manual
Telex Security Camera PW24 2 User Manual
Texas Instruments Stereo Amplifier TAS5518 User Manual
Toshiba Cordless Telephone DKT2404 DECT User Manual
Toshiba DVD Player SD K780 User Manual
Triarch Indoor Furnishings 31023 User Manual
Ultimate Support Systems Video Game Keyboard JS XS300 User Manual
Uniden Telephone DSS 2405 User Manual
VTech Cordless Telephone VT 1421 User Manual
VTech Laptop 91 01592 006 User Manual